JP2008183450A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine enhancing a game player's interest caused by transition to a special game state. <P>SOLUTION: A CPU 41a operates a regular bonus simultaneously with transition to a big bonus, and during the big bonus, it is determined game by game whether or not the regular bonus is active. When the regular bonus is determined to be inactive, again the regular bonus is operated, whereby during the operation of the big bonus, the machine is always controlled to the regular bonus. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and is particularly advantageous for a player such as a big bonus. The present invention relates to a slot machine having a special gaming state.

  Conventionally, for example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a special prize (for example, a combination of “7-7-7”) is prepared on a variable display device composed of a plurality of reels, a special gaming state advantageous to a player such as a big bonus The slot machine that moves to is common.

  In this type of slot machine, a game called a big bonus game is provided in which a combination of JACIN winning prizes is arranged with a high probability when shifting to a big bonus. A lot of gaming value (game media such as medals and pachinko balls) that can be expected to acquire a regular bonus that can be expected to be acquired, that is, with the control to the big bonus game, the regular bonus is highly probable In many cases, the special game state is controlled to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state by generating the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-85646 A

  However, as in Patent Document 1, in a slot machine that generates a regular bonus with a high probability during a big bonus game, a regular bonus is generated with a high probability during the big bonus game, but the transition to the regular bonus during the big bonus game is performed. If the JACIN winning combination is not complete, the game will not shift to the regular bonus, and the big bonus game will have less game value than the regular bonus, and the game value will be consumed when the big bonus game is consumed. Therefore, since the speed at which the gaming value increases in the special gaming state is slowed down, there is a problem that the interest of the player accompanying the transition to the special gaming state cannot be sufficiently increased.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can enhance the interest of the player accompanying the transition to the special gaming state.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each game Is a slot machine in which one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state when a transition winning with a transition of the gaming state occurs in a normal game;
Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period a special game in which a special prize that accompanies the provision of the gaming value in the special gaming state occurs with a higher probability than the normal game;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled in the special game state;
With
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game for each game in the special game state,
The special game control means starts control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is not controlled.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, while being controlled in the special gaming state, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game for each game, and if not controlled by the special game, the control of the special game is started. The game value can be increased fastest in the special gaming state, so that the player's interest in the transition to the special gaming state can be enhanced rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the past. Can be increased.
Further, since it is determined whether or not each game is controlled by a special game, the control program for each game in the special game state can be shared, so that the program capacity can be reduced.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, the award winning is not limited as long as a game value is given when the winning occurs, and the same type of winning award may be generated in the base game and the special game, or different. There may be a type of prize winning.
The special game control means controlling the special game for a predetermined period of time. When the special game starts, a predetermined number of games (one game or a plurality of games may be used). ) May be controlled until a special game is reached, or after the special game has started, a special game end condition (for example, a specified number of times (may be one or more) The game may be controlled to a special game until a winning is achieved). Furthermore, even if a special game is reached until a predetermined number of games is reached after a special game starts or a predetermined special game end condition is met, the special game is controlled. good.
Further, the special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In this case, while the special game state is being controlled, the special game is controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
In addition, the special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled at the end of each game, recognizes the game in which the transition winning is generated as a special gaming state, and generates the transition winning Even in such a game, it may be determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game. Even in this case, it is only necessary to control the special game while the game is controlled to the special game state. The control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.
Further, the special game determination means may determine whether or not the game in which the transition prize has occurred is controlled by the special game at the start of each game without recognizing the game as a special game state. Even in this case, it is only necessary to control the special game while the special game state is being controlled, so that the control accompanying the transition to the special game state can be simplified.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
Special game state end condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined special game state end condition is satisfied in the special game state;
Special gaming state ending means for ending the special gaming state when the special gaming state ending condition determining means determines that the ending condition is satisfied;
With
The special game control means ends the control of the special game together with the end of the special gaming state regardless of whether or not the predetermined period has expired,
The special game determining means determines that the special game state end condition is not satisfied after the special game state end condition determining means determines whether or not the special game state end condition is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the special game is controlled only when determined.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the determination as to whether or not the special game state end condition is satisfied, whether or not the special game state end condition is satisfied is determined. Since it is performed only when it is determined that there is no special game state, a determination for starting a special game, that is, an unnecessary determination is not performed.

The slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each game Is a slot machine in which one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state when a transition winning with a transition of the gaming state occurs in a normal game;
Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period a special game in which a special prize that accompanies the provision of the gaming value in the special gaming state occurs with a higher probability than the normal game;
With
The special game control means resumes the control of the special game when the predetermined period expires after the control of the special game starts and the control of the special game ends.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control of the special game is finished while being controlled to the special game state, the special game is resumed, so that the gaming value can be increased fastest in the special game state. Therefore, the interest of the player associated with the transition to the special game state can be enhanced rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the prior art.
Further, since the process for re-activating the special game is performed only when the control of the special game is finished, unnecessary processing is not performed in a state where the control of the special game is not finished.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, the award winning is not limited as long as a game value is given when the winning occurs, and the same type of winning award may be generated in the base game and the special game, or different. There may be a type of prize winning.
The special game control means controlling the special game for a predetermined period of time. When the special game starts, a predetermined number of games (one game or a plurality of games may be used). ) May be controlled until a special game is reached, or after the special game has started, a special game end condition (for example, a specified number of times (may be one or more) The game may be controlled to a special game until a winning is achieved). Furthermore, even if a special game is reached until a predetermined number of games is reached after a special game starts or a predetermined special game end condition is met, the special game is controlled. good.
Further, the special game control means may start control of the special game simultaneously with the start of the special game state. In this case, while the special game state is being controlled, the special game is controlled. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 3,
Special game state end condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined special game state end condition is satisfied in the special game state;
Special gaming state ending means for ending the special gaming state when the special gaming state ending condition determining means determines that the ending condition is satisfied;
With
The special game control means includes
Regardless of whether or not the predetermined period has expired, the special game state is terminated and the special game is terminated.
Whether or not the special game state end condition is satisfied by the special game state end condition determining means when the predetermined period has expired after the start of the special game control and the special game control ends. After the determination is made, the control of the special game is resumed only when it is determined that the termination condition for the special gaming state is not satisfied.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special game is resumed only when it is determined that the termination condition for the special gaming state is not satisfied after it is determined whether the termination condition for the special gaming state is satisfied. Therefore, the special game is not resumed even though the special game state ends immediately after the special game state ends.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
An external output control means for performing control for externally outputting a special game signal indicating that the game is controlled by the special game;
The external output control means performs control to stop the output of the special game signal for a predetermined time and then start the output again when the special game ends and is again controlled by the special game.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the special game is finished and is again controlled by the special game, the output of the special game signal stops for a predetermined time, so that the special game is temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the signal. For example, it is possible to appropriately perform a test such as whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from an externally output signal.
It should be noted that the time for the external output control means to stop outputting the game signal may be a time that allows the external device to determine that the signal has been interrupted.

A slot machine according to claim 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means, one of the allowable stages is selected and set from a plurality of allowable stages having different ratios for determining that the pre-determination means allows the generation of a prize. An acceptable stage setting means;
Data storage means for storing data for performing control of a game including data indicating the allowable stage set by the allowable stage setting means in a readable and writable manner;
Stored data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determination means determines that the data stored in the data storage means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. A disabling release means for releasing the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed,
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, the progress of the game is disabled, and an allowable stage (set value) is newly set based on the operation of the setting operation means. If the game is not selected or set, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, it is not an allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine, but an allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means (general In addition, since the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is played based on the permissible stage selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game should be ensured Can do.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
A main control board equipped with a main control means for controlling the game;
A sub control board equipped with sub control means for controlling the production based on reception of control information transmitted from the main control means;
A relay board for communicably connecting the main control board and the sub control board;
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the main control board and the sub control board are communicably connected via the relay board, and the sub control board is not directly connected to the main control board. It is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main control means from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
A permissible stage setting means for selecting and setting any one of the permissible stages from a plurality of types of permissible stages having different ratios for determining whether or not winning is permitted by the pre-determining means;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data to be updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before the determination by the prior determination means;
For any one of the winnings, it is determined so that a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area can be specified. The range specifying data is stored in common for the plurality of types of permissible stages, and the winning numerical value data not stored in common for the permissible stages is stored in the numerical value data for determination input to the determination area. On the other hand, the range specifying data determined so that the range of the judgment value that the predetermining means determines to allow the generation can be specified is individually stored according to the type of the allowable stage. Range specifying data storage means;
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including an allowance determining means for determining whether or not the occurrence of a prize is permitted, and determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize determined by the allowance determining means to indicate that the occurrence is permitted. ,
The range specifying data storage means stores different range specifying data capable of specifying a range of different determination values as range specifying data to be stored individually according to the type of the permissible step, and individually stored according to the type of the permissible step. The same range specifying data indicating the range of the same determination value as the range specifying data to be stored according to the type of the winning prize,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the range specifying data is stored in the range specifying data storage means in common with a plurality of types of allowable stages for any of the winnings, it is thus common to the plurality of types of allowable stages. With respect to the winning in which the range specifying data is stored, the storage capacity necessary for storing the range specifying data can be reduced. That is, it is possible to suppress the data amount of the range specifying data necessary for determining whether or not winning is allowed.
In addition, the range specifying data storage means stores range specifying data common to a plurality of types of allowable stages for any winning, and individually specifies range specifying data corresponding to the types of allowable levels for other winnings. This includes the same range specifying data indicating the range of the same determination value as the range specifying data stored individually according to the type of the permissible stage. The range specification data determines the probability that the pre-determining means determines that each winning is allowed according to the allowable stage, but in the development model, this judgment value data is finely adjusted. In general, the simulation is performed (the initial judgment value data may be different or may be the same). And the range of the suitable judgment value obtained by the result of simulation shall be applied to the model for mass production. Here, even if the range of the judgment value is the same regardless of the allowable stage as a result of performing the simulation while changing the range of the judgment value according to the permissible stage, such a type of winning is not changed. The range specifying data may be stored individually according to the type of the allowable stage.
In addition, if the range specification data is initially stored as the same range specification data indicating the same judgment value range according to the type of the permissible stage, the range specification data initially registered according to the simulation result If it is acceptable, it can be stored in the range specifying data storage means as it is as the same number of range specifying data. When there is a problem with the range specifying data that is initially registered as a result of the simulation, the range of the judgment value can be changed according to the allowable stage and stored in the range specifying data storage means as the unequal range specifying data. . For this reason, since the storage mode of the range specifying data in the development model can be used as it is in the mass production model, development from the initial design stage to the mass production model can be easily performed.
Note that storing the range specifying data individually according to the types of allowable steps does not necessarily mean that the range specifying data is stored individually for the number of types of allowable steps. If the range specifying data is not stored in common, it is included in this. For example, when there are six types of allowable stages (first stage to sixth stage), the range identification data is allowed in the case where the first to third stages are common and the fourth to sixth stages are common. Depending on the type, it is stored separately.
Further, the plurality of types of permissible steps that can be set by the permissible step setting means do not mean that the proportions at which the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of winnings must be different from each other in all types. It is only necessary that the permissible ratio in the types of the different types is different from the permissible ratio in the other types. However, it does not preclude being different in all types.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, means 1 and 2,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data to be updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before the determination by the prior determination means;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specific data storage means for storing specific data;
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including an allowance determining means for determining whether or not the occurrence of a prize is permitted, and determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize determined by the allowance determining means to indicate that the occurrence is permitted. ,
The slot machine is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
Input means for inputting n-bit array data signals output from the latch circuit to the specific area as numerical data of n bits without changing the bit array order;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means replaces the specific bit data of the n-bit numerical data input to the specific area with the other bits of the numerical data, and performs the replacement n The bit replacement numerical data is input to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, for the numerical data corresponding to the n-bit array data signal extracted from the counter circuit, the replacement numerical data obtained by replacing the data of the specific bit with the data of the other bits by the replacement means is used for determination. Input as numerical data. For this reason, the periodicity of the numerical data for determination used for the determination can be lost even if the determination value used for determining whether or not the generation of the prize is allowed to vary. Thereby, even if the determination value is fixed for each type of winning by using the range specifying data indicating the range of the determination value for each type of winning, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming. Moreover, the periodicity of the numerical data input by the input means can be lost simply by exchanging specific bits, and the processing load does not increase so much without providing a special circuit.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 3,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data to be updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before the determination by the prior determination means;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specific data storage means for storing specific data;
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including an allowance determining means for determining whether or not the occurrence of a prize is permitted, and determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize determined by the allowance determining means to indicate that the occurrence is permitted. ,
The slot machine is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
Input means for inputting the n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit to the specific area as n-bit first numerical data without changing the bit array order;
Numerical value updating means for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Numerical value extraction means for extracting second numerical data updated by the numerical value update means when the predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical data extracted by the numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k) is used. Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs the operation result numerical data composed of the upper k bits and the lower j bits after the operation by the operation means to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the operation result numerical value is not obtained by performing the operation on the first numerical data as it is using the second numerical data but by performing the operation on the upper k bits of the first numerical data. The variation of the numerical value indicated by the data increases. For this reason, the periodicity of the numerical data for determination used for the determination can be lost even if the determination value used for determining whether or not the occurrence of the winning is allowed is not varied. Thereby, even if the determination value is fixed for each type of winning by using the range specifying data indicating the range of the determination value for each type of winning, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming. Further, the periodicity of the first numerical data input by the input means can be lost only by extracting the second numerical data from the numerical value updating means and calculating the upper k bits, and without providing a special circuit. , Processing load does not become so large.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 4,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data to be updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before the determination by the prior determination means;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specific data storage means for storing specific data;
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including an allowance determining means for determining whether or not the occurrence of a prize is permitted, and determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize determined by the allowance determining means to indicate that the occurrence is permitted. ,
The slot machine is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
Input means for inputting the n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit to the specific area as n-bit first numerical data without changing the bit array order;
First numerical value updating means for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Second numerical value updating means for updating third numerical data different from the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
First numerical value extracting means for extracting second numerical data from the first numerical value updating means by satisfying a predetermined extraction condition;
Second numerical value extraction means for extracting third numerical data from the second numerical value update means when a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical value extracted by the first numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k). Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation using data and performing a predetermined calculation using the third numerical data extracted by the second numerical value extracting means for the lower j bits;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs arithmetic result numerical data consisting of upper k bits after the operation by the arithmetic means and lower j bits after the operation to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the operation result is obtained by performing the operation on the upper k bits of the first numerical data instead of performing the operation on the first numerical data as it is using the second numerical data. The variation in numerical values indicated by numerical data increases. The variation is further increased by performing an operation on the lower j bits. For this reason, the periodicity of the numerical data for determination used for the determination can be lost even if the determination value used for determining whether or not the occurrence of the winning is allowed is not varied. Thereby, even if the determination value is fixed for each type of winning by using the range specifying data indicating the range of the determination value for each type of winning, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming. Further, the periodicity of the first numerical data inputted by the input means can be obtained only by extracting the second and third numerical data from the first and second numerical value updating means and calculating the upper k bits and the lower j bits. It can be lost, and the processing load is not so great without providing a special circuit.
The specific area and the determination area in the means 3 to 5 may be the same area or different areas.

A slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 5,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow generation of a winning including the transition winning and the normal winning other than the transition winning before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data to be updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before the determination by the prior determination means;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specific data storage means for storing specific data;
With
The range specifying data storage means stores, as the range specifying data, overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that determine that both the transition winning and the normal winning are allowed simultaneously. And
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range input by the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit. Including a winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the generation of a prize is permitted, and determining that the occurrence of a winning determined to be permitted by the permission determining means is permitted. ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the transition winning and the normal winning are generated by the predetermining means. Is determined to be permitted at the same time, and therefore, when a normal winning is generated as a result of the game, it can be expected that a transition winning is permitted. Moreover, since the transition winning and the normal winning can be determined by one allowance determining unit, the processing by the pre-determining unit can be simplified.
Further, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values that will determine that the occurrence of only the transfer winning is permitted, the transfer winning and It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that will determine that both occurrences of the normal winning are allowed at the same time. In this way, the result of the game Even if the normal winning does not occur, it is not denied that the generation of the transition winning is permitted, so that even in such a situation, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the transition winning can be maintained.
Further, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values that determine that the occurrence of only the normal winning is permitted, the transition winning and It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that will determine that both occurrences of the normal winning are allowed at the same time. In this way, the result of the game Even when a normal winning is generated, it is not denied that the generation of the transfer winning is permitted. Therefore, even in such a situation, the player's expectation for the generation of the shifting winning can be maintained.

The slot machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 6,
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow generation of a winning including the transition winning and the normal winning other than the transition winning before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data to be updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before the determination by the prior determination means;
With respect to the normal winning, it was determined so that a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination area can be specified Normal winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data;
The transition prize is determined so that the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of numerical data for determination input to the determination area can be specified. A transition winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data;
With
The range of determination values that the predetermining means determines to allow the occurrence of the transfer prize is the determination value that determines that the predetermining means allows the occurrence of the normal prize Including a range of judgment values that overlap with the range of
The pre-determining means includes
The occurrence of the normal winning is determined depending on whether or not the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the normal winning range specifying data storage means includes the determination numerical data input to the determination area. A normal winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not to indicate that it is permitted;
Whether or not the same numerical value data for determination as that used for determination by the normal winning allowance determination means is included in the range of determination values specified by the range specification data stored in the range specification data storage means for transfer prize A transition winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the transition winning is permitted.
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the normal winning allowance determining means and the transition winning allowance determining means,
When it is determined that both the normal winning allowance determining means and the transition winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, it is determined that both the normal winning and the transition winning are permitted.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the transition winning and the normal winning are generated by the predetermining means. Is determined to be permitted at the same time, and therefore, when a normal winning is generated as a result of the game, it can be expected that a transition winning is permitted.
In addition, the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the occurrence of the transition prize is determined to determine that the pre-deciding means permits the occurrence of the normal prize. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the transfer winning allowance determining means indicates that a winning is allowed, the transfer winning only Both the normal prize and the transition prize are determined when it is determined that both the normal prize acceptance judgment means and the transition prize acceptance judgment means indicate that the occurrence of a prize is permitted. It may be determined that the occurrence is allowed. In this way, even if a normal winning does not occur as a result of the game, it is not denied that the occurrence of the transition winning is permitted. Like Also it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the migration winning occurrence in a situation.
In addition, the range of determination values that the pre-determining unit determines to allow the occurrence of the normal winning is determined that the pre-determining unit allows the generation of the transfer winning. Including a range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values, and the pre-determining means determines that only the normal winning is determined when it is determined that only the normal winning permission determining means indicates that the winning is permitted. Both the normal prize and the transition prize are determined when it is determined that both the normal prize acceptance judgment means and the transition prize acceptance judgment means indicate that the occurrence of a prize is permitted. It may be determined that the occurrence is allowed. In this way, even if a normal winning occurs as a result of the game, it is not denied that the occurrence of the transition winning is permitted. Status Oite also it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the transition winning generation.

  In the means 2 to 7, the range specifying data determined so that the range of the determination value can be specified may be the data itself indicating the range of the determination value, or the determination value of each winning prize The total number of values may be stored, and the range of determination values may be specified from the total number of determination values and the determination value of each winning prize. Also, the judgment value other than the winning prize determined last and the total number of judgment values are stored, and the remaining judgment value range excluding the judgment value other than the winning prize determined last from the total judgment value is finally determined. It may be one that can be specified as a range of determination values for winning.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and a side end of the housing. It consists of a pivoted front door.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are respectively provided correspondingly and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range (in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state described later) 3 is a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a regular bonus to be described later, 1), and the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bets are settled (for setting credits and bets). The payout switch 10 operated when the medal used is returned), the start switch 7 operated when starting the game, the reels 2L, 2C, 2 Stop switch 8L is operated to each stop of the rotation, 8C, 8R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value described later And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and functioning as a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (out-run rate) of the lottery, and a power switch 39 operated when turning on / off the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the prescribed number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state described later, and one is determined in the regular bonus described later. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination on each of the activated pay lines L1-L5 is a reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the above-described one-sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, and reel sensor 33. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection signals of these connected switches are input. It is like that.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. An interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not inputted, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. A reset circuit 49 to be applied and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set in either an interrupt mode for generating an external interrupt in accordance with the timer mode or an interrupt mode for generating an internal interrupt in accordance with the number of clock inputs to the CPU 41a.

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with a refresh register 41R (see FIG. 48) for performing this refresh operation. The refresh register 41R is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b. The value is updated every execution time of one instruction. Is called.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls for production, mounted on production control board 90 Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, a power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, other than 0 In addition to storing specific data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a executes a set value determination process for determining whether or not a set value used for the internal lottery in the internal lottery process described later is an appropriate value.

  In the set value determination process, the set value determination process 1 for determining whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is within an appropriate range (1 to 6), the set value used for the internal lottery, and the setting set when the setting is changed Setting value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the setting value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match The set value determination process 3 to be determined is executed for each game.

  In the setting value determination process 1, when the setting value used for the internal lottery is not a value in the proper range, or in the setting value determination process 2, the setting value used for the internal lottery, the setting value set when the setting is changed, If the set values do not match or the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game does not match the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game in the set value determination process 3, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. The RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state to disable the progress of the game. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus and a normal gaming state as gaming states. Among these, 1 is set as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and a bet corresponding to the normal gaming state is set. 3 is defined as the prescribed number. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game is started when the betting number is set to 3. Can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combination permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a winning combination table by gaming state. The gaming state winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and is used to determine the combination determined to be winning in the internal lottery. The combination determined according to the game state is shown. In this slot machine 1, as a special role, a regular bonus, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2) are JAC, cherry, 1 piece (1), 1 piece (2), a bell, Replay is defined as a re-playing role.

  In the regular bonus game state, JAC, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bells, which are small roles, are determined as winning roles, and are subject to lottery in the internal lottery in the regular bonus. Is done. In the normal gaming state, a regular bonus that is a special role, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a cherry that is a small role, 1 (1), 1 (2) and a bell, and a replay that is a re-game Is determined as a winning combination, and is a lottery target in an internal lottery in a normal gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in the regular bonus game state, in addition to cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell, JAC is determined as a small winning role, but regular bonus game Also in the state, as in the normal gaming state, only the cherry, one (1), one (2), and the bell may be determined as winning small combinations.

  JAC is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Bell-Watermelon” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the regular bonus, but in the gaming state other than the regular bonus, even if this combination is arranged, the JAC is not awarded. . Cherry is awarded when the symbol “cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state. One (1) is awarded when the combination of “blue 7-red 7-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. One (2) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. A bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. The payout of medals when these small roles are won will be described later.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, but with the regular bonus, even if this combination is arranged, the replay is not won. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 466. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). In addition, the regular bonus (1), the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be simply referred to as “bonus”.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery will be described. The internal lottery decides whether or not the winning of each winning combination is allowed before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, an internal lottery random number obtained, the number of bets set by the player, and the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the set value are determined. Is called.

  The reference of the combination according to the game state is performed according to the combination table according to the game state shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a regular bonus (including a case where the bonus is provided during a big bonus), JAC, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are read in order as an internal lottery target role, When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, and replay are in turn as the internal lotteries. Read out. However, if the winning flag of the regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2) is set in the game before the previous game and the game is carried over without winning based on the flag, the regular bonus, big bonus (1 ), Big Bonus (2) will not be a target for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined for the internal lottery target combination is sequentially added to the internal lottery random number, and when the addition result overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. When the winning is determined, the winning flag of the combination is set in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. The determination value number is read according to the storage address of the determination value number registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes.

  The number of determination values for each combination is registered corresponding to the number of bets (BET) set by the player. This is because even if they have the same combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the number of bets. In addition, the number of determination values according to the number of bets for each combination may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table, as shown in FIG. 4B, regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), JAC, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, replay The storage addresses for the number of judgment values are registered.

  The regular bonus is a role that is an object of an internal lottery in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. For the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address for the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are internal lottery targets in the normal gaming state, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state are registered. . For the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), the common flag is 0, and the storage address for the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  The JAC is a role that is subject to internal lottery only with the regular bonus, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 1 with the regular bonus is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell are roles that are subject to internal lottery in both the regular bonus and the normal gaming state, and correspond to 1 bet with the regular bonus. A storage address for the number of determination values and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state are registered. Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2) have a common flag of 1, and storage addresses for the same number of judgment values are registered for each bet regardless of the set value. Yes. For the bell, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Replay is a combination that is a target of an internal lottery in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. The common flag of this combination is 1, and the storage address of the common determination value number is registered regardless of the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. Of course, only the JAC, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2) and Bells that are the payouts of medals when winning a prize are included. Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell can be awarded when the number of bets is 1 (regular bonus) or 3 (normal game state). When the bet number is 1, that is, when the gaming state is in the regular bonus, more medals are paid out than when the bet number is 3, that is, when the gaming state is in the normal gaming state.

  The regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state, and are not eligible for payout of medals. The replay does not involve paying out medals, but it is substantially the same as paying out 3 medals because it is not necessary to insert medals for setting the number of bets in the next game (always the normal gaming state).

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, the addresses ADD + 36 and ADD + 74 are addresses that are referred to regardless of the bet number and the set value when the target of the internal lottery is JAC and replay, respectively, 2245 is acquired as the number of determination values.

  The address ADD is an address that is referred to when the number of bets is 3, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1, and at this time, the value stored here 31 is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referenced when the number of bets is 3, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 2 to 6 in the normal gaming state. is there. Regarding the regular bonus, when the number of bets is 3, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. However, since the same number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus of any set value is stored. The winning probability is the same.

  Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are each when the number of bets is 3, that is, when the target for internal lottery is a big bonus (1) and the set value is 1 to 6 in the normal gaming state The address to be referenced. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are each when the number of bets is 3, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the internal lottery target is a big bonus (2) and the set value is 1-6 The address to be referenced. For the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), the number of judgment values referred to when the number of bets is 3 is individually stored according to the set value, and a different number of judgment values is stored. The winning probabilities differ depending on the set value.

  The address ADD + 38 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the bet number is 1, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target character of the internal lottery is cherry. The address ADD + 40 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the bet number is 3, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is cherry in the normal gaming state. The number of judgment values for cherry is registered according to the number of bets, but since the same value is registered, the winning probability of cherry is the same regardless of whether it is a regular bonus or a normal gaming state Become. The number of determination values is also registered in the same way for addresses ADD + 42 and ADD + 44 for one sheet (1), and the number of determination values is also registered for addresses ADD + 46 and ADD + 48 for one sheet (2).

  Addresses ADD + 50, ADD + 52, ADD + 54, ADD + 56, ADD + 58, and ADD + 60 are addresses that are referenced when the bet number is 1, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the regular bonus. is there. Since the same value is registered in each of the addresses ADD + 50 and ADD + 52, ADD + 54 and ADD + 56, and ADD + 58 and ADD + 60, the set value 1 and the set value 2, the set value 3 and the set value 4 and the set value are set at the regular bonus time. With 5 and the set value 6, the winning probability of the bell is the same.

  Addresses ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, and ADD + 72 are addresses that are referenced when the number of bets is 3, that is, in the normal game state, when the target character of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1-6. It is. Since different values are registered in the addresses ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, and ADD + 72, the winning probability of the bell differs depending on the set value in the normal gaming state.

  FIGS. 6 and 7 are diagrams showing examples of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values of each combination and the winning combination. FIG. 6 shows an example in the normal game state, and FIG. 7 shows an example in the small role game. Both FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 show an example in which the set value is 6, and also show an example in which neither a regular bonus nor a big bonus winning flag is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 6, in the normal gaming state, the roles that are the targets of the internal lottery are regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), cherry, 1 (1), 1 ( 2) Bell and replay. In the setting value 6, the number of determination values is 31, 20, 40, 96, 163, 163, 2082, and 2245, respectively. First, the regular bonus that is the target of the internal lottery is won when 16353 to 16383, in which the addition result overflows by adding 31 judgment values, is acquired as a random number for internal lottery.

  Next, for the big bonus (1) that is the subject of the internal lottery, the addition result overflows by adding 51, which is the sum of the regular bonus judgment value number 31 and the big bonus (1) judgment value number 20. Is obtained when 16333 to 16352 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, Big Bonus (2) is obtained when 16293-16332 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and Cherry is obtained when 16197-16292 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery. When 16034-16196 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 1 (2), when 15871-16033 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Bell is 13789-15870 as internal lottery When it is acquired as a random number for use, the replay is determined to be winning when 11544 to 13788 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery.

  The approximate winning probabilities for each combination calculated based on the number of judgment values are as follows: regular bonus (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2 ), Bell and Replay, 1 / 528.5, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 409.6, 1 / 170.1, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 7.9 1 / 7.3. When 0-11543 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, in the regular bonus, JAC, cherry, 1 piece (1), 1 piece (2), and the bell are subject to internal lottery, and the number of determination values is 27, 96, 163, Since it is 163, 15919, when 16357 to 16383, 16261 to 16356, 16098 to 16260, 15935 to 16907, and 16 to 15934 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 606.8, 1 / 170.1, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 1.03. When 0 to 15 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Next, acquisition of random numbers for internal lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The random numbers for the internal lottery are obtained by extracting random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 by the hardware random number function and processing them by software by the CPU 41a. Note that the least significant bit of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 or the processed random number is called the 0th bit, and the most significant bit is called the 15th bit.

  FIG. 8A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number generation circuit 42 in detail. As shown in the figure, the random number generation circuit 42 includes a pulse generation circuit 42a, a lower counter 42b, and an upper counter 42c. The lower counter 42b and the upper counter 42c are both 8-bit (1 byte) counters, the lower counter 42b is the 0th to 7th bits, and the upper counter 42c is a total of 16 bits from the 8th to 15th bits. The data signal is output.

  The pulse generation circuit 42a outputs a pulse signal at a frequency that is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a and is not an integral multiple thereof (preferably relatively prime). The pulse signal output from the pulse generation circuit 42a is clocked into the lower counter 42b.

  The lower counter 42b alternately inverts the 0th bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit 42a. Assuming that positive logic is applied, a logical value of H level corresponds to 1 and a logical value of L level corresponds to 0. In the case of negative logic, a logic value of 1 may be read as L level, and a logic value of 0 may be read as H level. When the level of the 0th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the 0th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the level of the 1st bit data signal is changed to H level. Inverted alternately with L level.

  Similarly, when the level of the (m−1) th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the (m−1) th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the mth bit data The signal level is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. The carry signal is output every time the level of the seventh bit data signal changes from H level, that is, the logical value of the seventh bit data signal changes from 1 to 0. The carry signal output from the lower counter 42b is clocked into the upper counter 42c.

  The upper counter 42c alternately inverts the eighth bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a carry signal is input from the lower counter 42b. Each time the level of the 9th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, the level of the 9th bit data signal is alternately inverted between H level and L level. Similarly, every time the level of the m−1th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the mth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level.

  The logic value of a 16-bit data signal in which the data signal of the lower counter 42b is the lower 8 bits and the data signal of the upper counter 42c is the upper 8 bits is 0 (0000H) every time the pulse generation circuit 42a outputs the pulse signal. ) → 1 (0001H) → 2 (0002H) →... → 65535 (FFFFH) The values are updated so as to be continuous every update, and the maximum value 65535 (FFFFH) is next to the initial value 0 (0000H). The value circulates and is output from the random number generation circuit 42.

  The sampling circuit 43 includes a latch circuit, and latches and latches a 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 at that time based on a sampling command (when the start switch 7 is operated) from the CPU 41a. Output the data signal. The CPU 41a extracts numerical data corresponding to the data signal input from the sampling circuit 43 via the I / O port 41d as a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. In the following description, the data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 is described as a random number corresponding to the logical value.

  FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. The random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a uses the calculation register to store the lower byte (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR and the upper byte. The value (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c) is exchanged.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation on the value of the random number obtained by exchanging the upper byte and the lower byte for the extracted random number with 8080H. Since the processing work of the CPU 41a is 1 byte, the logical OR operation is actually performed sequentially on the upper byte and the lower byte. By this OR operation, the 15th bit and the 7th bit are always 1. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit.

  The CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values for each combination. Since the 15th and 14th bits of the random number for internal lottery are always 1, the random number for internal lottery is a random number having a size of 14 bits (16384), which is substantially 0 to 16383. It takes a value.

  Note that interrupts to the CPU 41a are prohibited from the extraction of random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 to the end of processing. This is to prevent the contents of the general-purpose register 41GR from being rewritten in the interrupt processing routine when an interrupt is generated to the CPU 41a.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the table index stores the top address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored for each gaming state, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state). ing.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, replay, big bonus (1) (+ lose), big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay, Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (2) + Replay, Regular Bonus (+ Loss), Regular Bonus + Cherry, regular bonus + 1 (1), regular bonus + 1 (2), regular bonus + bell, regular bonus + replay, loser For each, the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored is stored, and for regular bonus, table creation for each of Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, JAC, Loss Stores the start address of the area where the business data is stored. In addition, even when the gaming state is different or the winning situation of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, in the case of cherry winning in the normal gaming state and in the case of cherry winning in the regular bonus) In the case of applying control, or in the case of applying the same control for big bonus (1) + replay winning, big bonus (2) + replay winning, regular bonus + replay winning, etc.) The same address is stored as the start address of the area where the table creation data is stored. In such a case, the stop control table is created with reference to the same table creation data. .

  The table creation data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may vary depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and based on the top address of the table creation data , It is possible to specify the address of the number of frame data to be referred to according to each situation, and it is necessary according to each situation from this identified address. It has to be able to identify the lead-frame number data. Even if the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address for the number of drawn frames when the same number of drawn frames is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 10, 21 areas (frames) divided into 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one revolution of the reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (this In the embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) located in the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3. It is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn when detected is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the game state and the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Then, the table creation data is specified based on the acquired head address, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn for each reel corresponding to the state in which all the reels are rotating is acquired from the specified table creation data, and the acquired address The drawing frame number data of each reel stored in is developed and a stop control table is created for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel is stopped or any two reels are stopped, the top address obtained at the start of reel rotation, that is, the table creation data corresponding to the game state and the internal winning state of the game is stored. The table creation data is identified based on the head address, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn in the non-stop reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel from the identified table creation data The number-of-drawing frame data of each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to create a stop control table for unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number corresponding to the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as the top address of the storage area for the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state. In the creation data, only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, data for table creation corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined, The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In addition, in the table index, the number of drawn-in frames is drawn so that the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and no winning combination is arranged, corresponding to the case where any combination is won. Stores the address of the specified table creation data, and stores the address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn in is determined so that none of the roles will be matched, corresponding to the case where the game is won ing. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. While the reel stop control is performed, if a win is won, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn that do not have any combination is defined, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align them and stop. The symbol of the winning combination will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In addition, the table index wins in response to a small role winning (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, etc.) when the special role has been carried over from before the previous game. The number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the special role can be drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and for the stop operation position where the selected special role cannot be drawn in the range of the maximum 4 frames, the selected small role is The address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to draw the maximum in the range of four frames is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to stop them together. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  In addition, the table index includes a range of 4 replays corresponding to the case where a replay player is elected with a special role carried over from before the previous game (such as big bonus (1) + replay). The address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The “watermelon” can be stopped at any position within the range, and the reel 2R is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, at an interval of 4 frames or less. Can be stopped. In other words, when the winning flags of bell, replay, and JAC are set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Replay” symbol will be used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table for drawing on L2 or L5 is created, and when the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L2 or L5 for the middle reel or the right reel, the stop control table for the left reel is 5 The “replay” symbol of the number, that is, when the symbol is stopped on the winning line L2 or L5, the “replay” symbol excluding the “replay” symbol that also stops the “cherry” on the winning line L1. A stop control table is created to draw on the winning line L2 or L5, and the middle reel and right reel are moved from the left reel. When stopped first, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5, and when the left reel is stopped thereafter, the “replay” symbol other than No. 5 is always placed on the winning line L2 or L5. Therefore, for example, when the “replay” symbol No. 5 stops on the winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel and the right reel, the replay and the cherry are not won simultaneously. In the left reel, the 2nd “Replay” design and the 7th “Replay” design are arranged within 4 frames, so even if control is performed to avoid the 5th “Replay” design, Regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the replay can always be won.

  In addition, when the winning flag for the bell is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table is drawn in on L1, and when the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as the stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, Thereafter, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged continuously. For this reason, the bell can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, and the bell and the cherry are not simultaneously won.

  In addition, when the winning flag of JAC is set and the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol must be placed on the winning line L1 within the pull-in range of 4 frames as the middle reel stop control table. A pull-in stop control table is created, and as a right reel stop control table, a stop control table is always created in which the “watermelon” symbol is drawn onto the pay line L1 within the pull-in range of 4 frames, and the mid-reel pay line L1 is set. In the state where the “bell” symbol is stopped or the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the winning line L1 of the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as a stop control table for the left reel, and the winning line is drawn in the drawing range of 4 frames. When a stop control table to be drawn onto L1 is created and the middle reel is stopped before the left reel, a “bell” symbol is placed on the winning line L1. If the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, and then the “bell” is always placed on the winning line L1 when the left reel is stopped. Control to draw the symbol is performed. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged continuously. For this reason, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, JAC can always be won, and JAC and Cherry do not win at the same time.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance in the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1) or one (2) is won. In this embodiment, the display result of the left reel is “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, or “Bell Red 7 Bell” of No. 8-10, “Replay of No. 15-17 "Blue 7 Watermelon" is stopped, and all the roles are not lined up on the winning line. As a result of displaying the middle reel, "Cherry Replay Cherry", No. 11-13, 20, 21, 1 The “Cherry Bell Cherry” of the number symbol stops, and the display mode in which none of the roles are aligned on the winning line and the display result of the right reel are “Replay Cherry Blue 7” of the number 9-12 symbol. Stop and any Have applied the display mode also not aligned on a winning line as a chance eyes.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. As a result of the display on the left reel, the display mode in which “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7” of symbols 16-18 is stopped is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 21, 1 or 12-14 The “Replay Watermelon Bell” symbol is stopped, the display mode in which none of the roles are aligned on the winning line is stopped, and the display mode in which no role is aligned on the winning line is displayed as a big bonus (1) or It is applied as a regular bonus reach.

  In this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won, each reel 2L, 2C, 2R Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, it is controlled so that chances can be derived, and when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is Regardless of the order in which they are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived, provided that each reel is stopped in an order that satisfies a specific condition (eg, left, middle, right). It may be possible to derive the chance eyes and reach eyes.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when the chance eyes and reach eyes are derived will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 10 shows a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), and one piece (1) is won without any bonus carried over (1 piece (1)). If none of the bonuses have been carried over and 1 (2) has been won (1 (2)), if no bonus has been carried over and the cherry has been won (Cherry), If the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won and no other role is won (BB (1) RB), the big bonus (2) is won and no other role is won It is a figure which shows the stop control table of the left reel produced in the case (BB (2)).

  First, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 10 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for all area numbers, “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8 to 10 and “ "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon", 12-14 design "Replay Watermelon Bell", 16-18 design "Blue 7 Watermelon Blue 7", 20, 21, 1 design "Replay The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “watermelon bell” is specified is determined, and 2 to 4 are display results that constitute a chance eye when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any timing. In the display result of the "Replay / Watermelon / Bell" of the symbols, the "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of the symbols 8 to 10, and the "Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon" of the symbols 15 to 17 and the reach There is a 12-14 pattern "Replay Watermelon Bell" No. 6-18 symbols “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7”, 20, 21, No. 1 symbols “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” are not derived as display results, and finally chances and reach eyes Does not hold.

  In the normal gaming state, when one bonus (1) is won in a state where no bonus has been carried over (one (1)), the left reel stop control table shown in FIG. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, the display result is specified in which “blue 7” constituting one (1) combination stops on any winning line for the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21. The number of drawn frames is determined. Particularly, for the region numbers 17 and 18, the number of drawn frames for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting one (1) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 17 and 18 among the timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay Blue 7 Watermelon” are derived, and if one (1) combination is not complete on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of pull-in frames specifying “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (1) is won, a higher rate than the display result in which “blue 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (1) stops on any winning line is derived, Chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  When one (2) is won in the state where no bonus has been carried over in the normal gaming state (1 (2)), as the left reel stop control table, one (2) in FIG. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In the stop control table, for the area numbers 9 to 15, the number of drawn frames for specifying the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of two (2) stops on any pay line is specified. In particular, for the region numbers 12 and 13, the number of frames to be drawn in which “bell, red 7 and bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are specified is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is specified for the region numbers 17 to 21. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any of the winning lines. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result is derived in which the “red 7” symbols constituting one (2) combination stop on any winning line. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if one (2) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17 to 21, “replay “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which “Red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of draw-in frames for which the display result of “Red 7” stopping on any winning line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (2) is elected, a higher rate than the display result in which “red 7” constituting the combination of one sheet (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chan Among the display results constituting the eyes, “Replay Watermelon Bell” and 15 to 17 of symbols 2 to 4 derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, BB (1) RB (1) of FIG. 10 is used as a stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table corresponding to the item is created. In this stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8, and 8 to 10 for the region numbers 12 and 13 is determined. Number of drawn frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the design symbol is specified, and “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of Design No. 20, 21, 1 is identified for the area number 1. The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the “replay watermelon bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the area number 16 is determined, and the “replay / blue” of the 15th to 17th symbols for the area number 17 is determined. “7. Watermelon” is specified, and the number of drawn frames is specified for area numbers 18 and 19, and “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” is specified for symbols 16-18. And chances and reach for other area numbers Number pull frames are defined to display other than the display results and a display mode in which configuration results are identifying.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there will be no winning combination, a chance will be established. If the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonus (1) is not complete, no other combination will be lined up on the winning line, and the chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and at the timing of the area number 1, the left reel is When a stop operation is detected, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols No. 20, 21, and 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, the reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus (1) is won is established, and when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18, The 16th to 18th symbols “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” are derived as the display result, and the reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. A table is created. In this stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4 is specified for the area numbers 4-7 is determined, and 8-10 for the area numbers 12-14. The number of drawn frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the number symbol is specified is determined, and the number of drawn frames in which “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the number 15 to 17 is identified for the area number 17 The number of frames to be drawn in which “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the area numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than the display result including the display mode constituting the eye is specified is determined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance will be established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonuses (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and a chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of No. 8-10 A stop control table that can specify “bell / red 7 / bell”, “replay / blue 7 / watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  Or, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (1) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye , "Replay watermelon bell" of symbols 2-4, and "Bell, red 7, bell" of symbols 8-10 can be specified as display results, and "blue" constituting a combination of one (1) 7 ”is a stop control table that can specify“ Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon ”of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbol can be stopped on the winning line. It is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (2) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as display results, and constitute a combination of one sheet (2). Stop control table that can identify "bell, red 7, bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the "red 7" symbol can be stopped on the winning line Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one winning combination (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chances can be derived. In particular, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line, 2-4 It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display results, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one (1). When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it is possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one (2) in the normal gaming state. When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up the combination of two (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, No. 2-4 symbols, 17th pattern When “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” can be derived as a display result, and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be stopped on the winning line, the 8th to 10th The symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” can be derived as a display result.

  In addition, when any of the roles is not won in the normal gaming state, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols A stop control table that can specify display results other than “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. Thus, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive a chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance chance when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12 and 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Derived Rukoto is not. That is, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the left reel stop operation at the above timing. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  At the start of reel rotation, the above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a stop control table for the left reel, and any one of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped. Even if both the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, if the symbols that make up the winning combination are on the winning line, The above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a left reel stop control table, except in the case where there is a possibility of the occurrence of a failure. In other words, when the left reel is stopped first, or when it is stopped second or third, the combination of symbols that make up the winning bonus is on the winning line of the already stopped reel Or, unless there is a possibility that a winning combination will win from the display result of a reel that has already been stopped, whether 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be won in the normal gaming state, If any bonus is won, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table from which the chance can be derived. If no combination is won, the chance is not derived. The reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table.

  In addition, for the middle reel and the right reel, stop control that can derive a chance when one (1) or one (2) is won in the normal gaming state or one of the bonuses is won. Stop control is performed based on the table.

  Although not specifically shown, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is Creates a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display result that constitutes the chance eye, as a stop control table for the middle reel, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel in the still rotating state In the state where at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel, the chance reel is configured as the stop control table for the right reel. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result to be specified is specified is created.

  In addition, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (1) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is determined as the stop control table for the middle reel. The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  In addition, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) is stopped, one sheet is placed on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel for the area where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of drawn frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of drawn frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting one (1) combination on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the middle reel stop control table Is generated.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped, and one is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is defined as the stop control table for the middle reel The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the left reel winning line stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped, and one is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) is stopped, one sheet is placed on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, as a stop control table for the middle reel. A winning line in which the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped in the area where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of drawn frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of drawn frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “red 7” symbol constituting one (2) combination on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the middle reel stop control table Is generated.

  On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state, the display constituting the chance eye is used as the stop control table for the middle reel or the right reel regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames other than the result is determined is created.

  Specifically, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the state, the stop control table for the middle reel created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels has the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers. When the number of frames to be drawn in which “Cherry Bell Cherry” of No. 20, 21, 1 is specified is determined, and a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, 11-13 One of the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21, 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result. Since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  In the normal gaming state, when any of the bonuses is won and no other combination is won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. When the number of drawn frames to be specified is determined and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of symbols 9 to 12 is derived as the display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one reel (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel created when the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of) is not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ When the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay Cherry”, No. 20, 21, 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers The 11th to 13th symbol “Cherry Replay Cherry” and the 20, 21st, 1st symbol “Cherry Bell Cherry” are derived as display results and finally entered Since the winning combination will not be aligned on the line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, there is one on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One area on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, against the area number that allows the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) to be drawn in the range of 4 frames. If the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result for stopping the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (1) is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left "Blue 7" symbol is stopped on reel On the winning line, display a result of the "red 7" symbol combination make up the one (1) is stopped is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “red 7” symbol on the winning line where the “blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn that specifies “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11 to 13 and “Cherry Bell Cherry” of No. 20, 21, and No. 1 is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any of “Cherry Replay Cherries” of No. 11 to 13 and “Cherry Bell Cherry” of Nos. 20, 21, and 1 are derived as display results. Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  In other words, when only one (1) is elected, at least one left (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the case where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the region number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the region number for identifying the display result constituting one (1) combination are obtained. A different stop control table is created.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of 1) are not stopped, the “9” symbols “9” to “12” described above for at least one area number are included. If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is displayed. "It is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel (2) is already on the winning line of the left reel with the left reel already stopped and the middle reel still rotating. In the middle reel stop control table created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of) are not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ When the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay Cherry”, No. 20, 21, 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers The 11th to 13th symbol “Cherry Replay Cherry” and the 20, 21st, 1st symbol “Cherry Bell Cherry” are derived as display results and finally entered Since the winning combination will not be aligned on the line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel (2) is already on the winning line of the left reel with the left reel already stopped and the middle reel still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, there is one on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One area on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, against the area number that can draw the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result for stopping the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left "Red 7" symbol is stopped on reel On the pay line display results of "blue 7" symbol combination constituting the one (2) is stopped it is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “blue 7” symbol on the winning line where the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11 to 13 and “Cherry Bell Cherry” of No. 20, 21, and No. 1 are specified is determined, and the timing of these area numbers is medium. When a reel stop operation is detected, any one of the 11th to 13th symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry” and the 20, 21st, 1st symbol “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  In other words, when only one (2) is elected, at least one left (2) is on the winning line of the left reel with at least the left reel already stopped and the middle reel still rotating. In the case where the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting one (2) combination are displayed. A different stop control table is created.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of 2) is not stopped, the “9” symbol “ If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” "It is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  The middle reel stop control table created when none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state shows the numbers 11 to 13 for any area number regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels. The number of draw-in frames for which display results other than “Cherry / Replay / Cherry” for symbols and “Cherry / Bell / Cherry” for No. 20, 21, and 1 are specified is determined. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when the winning combination is not selected, the lead-in frame for which display results other than “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols are specified for any area number. Since the number is fixed, there is no chance that the chance will be finalized.

  In addition, when any bonus is won in the normal game state and any other combination is not won, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the middle reel stop control table created in the normal game state, when only one (1) or one (2) is elected, at least the left reel has already stopped and the middle reel is still The middle reel stop control table created in the rotating state includes “Cherry Replay Cherry”, Nos. 21, 21, and 1 of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for the specific area numbers. Created when the number of draws that specify “Cherry Bell Cherry” in the design is fixed, but in the normal game state no role is won In the middle reel stop control table, for the specific area number mentioned above, the symbols other than “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11 to 13 and “Cherry Bell Cherry” of No. 20, 21, 1 The number of frames for which the display result is specified is determined. Therefore, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the middle reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the specific area number, and the display result constituting the chance eye On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the middle reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  In addition, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. If the right reel stop control table is created in the normal game state and only one (1) or one (2) is elected, at least one of the reels has already stopped. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when the right reel is still rotating, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols described above for the specific area number are used. The number of draws to be specified is determined, whereas in the normal gaming state, when no role is won and at least one of the reels is already The stop control table for the right reel, which is created when the right reel is still rotating, shows the “replay cherry cherry” of the 9th to 12th symbols for the specific area number described above. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “Blue 7” is specified. Therefore, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the right reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the specific area number, so that the display result constituting the chance eye In contrast, if no winning combination is won, even if the right reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  Next, the symbol arrangement on the left reel will be described with reference to FIG. 2. The 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus, 1 (2) is the upper stage of the left reel, Display modes (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stop at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) number 16 and 18 The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) in which the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn on up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line, You can draw the 16th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or you can draw the 18th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line You can't do that either. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. The Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (1), 1 ( Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) are respectively arranged, “red 7” "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, in the left reel stop control table created when the big bonus (2) or one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the “Blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line. Created when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of display frames to be drawn are determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the stop control table for the left reel, the “Red 7” symbol is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “Red 7” symbol stops on any winning line is different. There is no stop operation position at which the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  Next, error control associated with medal payout will be described. The CPU 41a performs control for driving out the hopper motor 34 and paying out medals in accordance with the occurrence of the small role winning and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets). At this time, if medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are clogged, the drive of the hopper motor 34 is stopped, and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. If a medal is not detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time despite the hopper motor 34 being driven, the hopper motor 34 is stopped once and the hopper motor 34 is restarted several times. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even after the trial, it is determined as a hopper error (error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper), and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. The error states associated with these medal jamming errors and hopper errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 23 and the reset / setting switch 38, and control for paying out the remaining medals is performed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, general work, special work, set value work 1 to 3, non-saved work, unused area, and stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out during the big bonus. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work 1 is a work in which a set value used when performing lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode), 1 is set. The setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The set value work 2 is a set value used to determine whether or not the set value read from the set value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the set value stored at the end of the setting. Is stored, and the setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The setting value work 3 is whether or not the setting value read from the setting value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the setting value used when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process of the previous game. This is a work for storing a setting value used when determining whether or not the setting value of the previous game is stored, and a setting value newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. When the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process for each game, the value is updated to the value read from the set value work 1. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 starts from the four at the end of one game when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, and at the start. When the initialization condition is satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. Initialization 1 uses the storage area of the RAM 41c. All areas except the middle stack area (including the unused area and the unused stack area) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. In the initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 pays out in response to the occurrence of a regular bonus, an RB signal indicating the big bonus, a BB signal indicating the big bonus, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet amount, and a winning. Output control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals as an external output signal. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via the external output board 110, and an external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41 a is connected to the external output board 110. Output to external devices.

  FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing the output status of the RB signal and BB signal when the big bonus occurs.

  When the big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting the BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON), the transition is repeated to the regular bonus until the end condition is satisfied, so it is always controlled to the regular bonus. However, as shown in FIG. 12, when the regular bonus is once ended and the next regular bonus is started, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to be ended ( When the output waiting time tw elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is established and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  Thus, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, the output of the RB signal is stopped for the output waiting time tw, and then the output is started again. It is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the RB signal. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the time at which it is possible to determine that the signal has been interrupted by the external device.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  The error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state.When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of a stop state is transmitted, and a reset operation is performed to indicate the error state. At the time of cancellation, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55 and the like are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of winning, a payout start command, a payout end, a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus, a standby command, a stop command, an error command, a setting start command. , Initialization commands, etc.) are stored, and when the CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the CPU 91a does not depend on the effect pattern set in the game. Referring to a specific control pattern corresponding to the command, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. If a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. Note that when a payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. The output of the sound effect is performed. That is, the other effects and the effects accompanying the payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. As will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are in the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed and the state when the progress stage ends (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51). Is continuously displayed and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the standby pattern described above is referred to as the control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 continuously executes over a plurality of games in the normal gaming state, and finally executes a continuous effect that notifies whether or not a bonus is won.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of continuous production.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 91a continuously determines whether to execute a continuous effect according to the result of the internal lottery every time the internal winning command is received in the normal gaming state, that is, every time the internal lottery is performed. When the production lottery is executed and the continuous production lottery is won, one continuous production pattern is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns according to the result of the internal lottery, and the continuous production is performed based on the selected continuous production pattern. Execute. On the other hand, even if the continuous production lottery is not won, if the chance is stopped, one continuous production pattern is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns according to the result of the internal lottery of the game and selected. The continuous effect is executed based on the continuous effect pattern.

  In addition, when the chance eyes are stopped during the execution of the continuous performance, the chance sales are invalidated, and the continuous performance is not newly executed. Further, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and if the bonus is announced, the continuous effect lottery is not performed thereafter. That is, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and when the bonus is announced, the continuous effect is not further executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance chance is derived in the normal gaming state and the RT. In addition, the continuous effect lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and the continuous effect is also executed when winning the continuous effect lottery. That is, in the normal gaming state, even if the chance is not derived, if the continuous production lottery is won, the continuous production is executed.

  Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the setting of bets and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting bets) and effects. 14 to 23 are timing charts showing a period during which the setting of the bet number is allowed and a period during which the credit settlement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, while the game is not being executed, setting of the bet number and credit settlement are permitted, and in this state, a medal is inserted or the bet amount is Settings are controlled to be possible. If a bet number can be set and a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state is not set, the bet number is incremented by one each time a medal is detected. Further, if a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, a credit is added by one each time a medal is detected. When the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the insertion of the medal is prohibited. . If the credits remain, the number of bets is set according to these switches by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the amount is subtracted from the credits. Further, if the credits remain or the bet number is set, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is used to set the medal and the bet amount stored as credits by driving the hopper motor 34. The given amount of medals is paid out and returned to the player, and credits and bets are subtracted according to the medals paid out.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are permitted, and the game is started, the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are prohibited at that time. Specifically, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. The time when the game is started is not the time when the rotation of the reel is started, but the time when the control stage is shifted by operating the start switch 7. This is because although a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, there is a case where a weight is applied. At this point, the game starts as a control stage although the reel rotation is on standby.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the display result is derived, it is determined that the game has ended, and when the end of the game is determined, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of credit settlement are lifted, and the setting of the bet amount and credit settlement are permitted. It becomes a state. As an exception, when a replay win occurs, the bet number is automatically set, so the setting of the bet number by the player's operation remains prohibited. In this state, Credit settlement is also prohibited.

  As a result of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, if a winning with a medal payout has occurred, display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. The end of the game is not determined at that time, and when the medal payout associated with the occurrence of the winning is completed, the end of the game is determined. Number setting and credit settlement are permitted.

  Further, if the big bonus winning is generated as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, as shown in FIG. 16, the game is performed when the display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Is determined to end, and the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect. The stage at the BB winning stage is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage. First, when the stage shifts to the stage where the dynamic stage is executed over the stage time of the stage at the BB winning stage, the stage is completed. The process moves to the final stage where the state continues. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and this elapsed time is set longer than the period until the above-mentioned BB winning effect is reached at the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the time effect stage waiting time is reached, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. Thus, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect at the time of power interruption, and at the next start-up, the BB winning effect effect is based on the backed up counter value. Since the waiting time is restarted, the time (Tb period in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the interruption from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect is restored when the interruption is restored. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when a power interruption occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, when a power interruption occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, a flag indicating that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, or a BB winning effect) (Elapsed time since the execution of BB) is backed up, and at the next activation, it is backed up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, indicates that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage) When the flag is set or when the time elapsed since the execution of the BB winning effect has reached the final stage), the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and the BB winning effect is performed. If the fact that is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 19, after the end of the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a until the stage waiting time for the BB prize presentation effect is reached. If a payment error occurs during the payment of credits and a payout error occurs during the payment of the medal associated with this payment, the time elapsed from the time when the game is determined to be generated will be generated as an error. Resume from the state of time. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect even during the error occurrence, and after canceling the error, the BB winning effect based on the maintained counter value. When the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) is removed when the payout error is canceled. When the period of (medium Td) elapses, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in an elapsed stage. It is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is at the final stage as in the case of power interruption. It returns in the state of. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data only on whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It will return in the state of. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, in the game during the big bonus, as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, some wins occur and the total number of payouts in the big bonus reaches 466 If the game is a game and the stop function is not set, as shown in FIG. 16, the end of the game is determined when the medal payout is completed, and the CPU 91a executes the ending effect. . The ending effect is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage, as in the case of the BB winning effect. First, a transition is made to an elapsed stage in which a dynamic effect is executed over the effect time of the ending effect. When is finished, the process proceeds to the final stage where the state is continued. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the waiting time is reached, and the number of bets is set when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. The prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. In other words, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the ending effect production waiting time at the time of power interruption, and at the next activation, measures the ending effect production waiting time based on the counter value that is backed up. Therefore, when power is restored, the bet is made when the time (Tb in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed. The prohibition of the setting of the number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, after the flag or ending effect indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is executed). (Elapsed time) is backed up, and the next time it is activated, it is backed up that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, when the flag indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is set, or the ending effect) If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, Will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a is in the period until reaching the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying the checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the ending effect stage waiting time even during the occurrence of an error, and after the error is released, the ending effect stage waiting time is based on the maintained counter value. Therefore, when the payout error is canceled, the time (Td period in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) from the production waiting time of the ending effect is released. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. That is, the sub-control unit 91 maintains only data indicating whether the ending effect being executed is in the elapsed stage or the final stage when the error occurs, and when the error is canceled, the data indicating that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage If the ending effect is maintained, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the ending effect is in the final stage is maintained, the ending effect returns to the final stage state. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, if the big bonus end condition is satisfied and the stop function is set, as shown in FIG. 20, the end of the game is determined at the time when the medal payout is ended. The above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. Since the stop state is controlled when the waiting time is reached, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated even when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the rendering waiting time of the ending effect. Until the bet is set, the setting of the bet number remains prohibited. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the setting of the bet number is also released. The bet number setting is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41 a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, after a time (period Tf in the figure) excluding time (period Te in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or reset / When the setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 23, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a is in the period until reaching the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying the checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, when the payout error is canceled, after the time (time period Tg in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tg in the figure) from the rendering waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the end condition of the big bonus is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus reaches 466. Therefore, in a game in which the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied, the medals must be paid out. When the payout ends, the end of the game is determined. For example, when applying that the big bonus reaches the specified number of games as an end condition, the game in which the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied In this case, the end of the game is determined when the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal has not been input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), the state of the stop switch 36 is acquired, and a specific register of the CPU 41a is acquired. The valid / invalid of the stop function is set in (Sa4). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption) In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 25, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is confirmed, it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3), and the error code indicates an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error. In this case, after initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5), and the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb4. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 24, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 26, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 26, since the setting value stored in the setting value work 1 of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work 1 is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process) Is 1) (Sc1).

  After that, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added to (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  Further, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in all of the set value works 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c, and the set value is confirmed. After that (Sc7), the process waits until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). Then, if it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether or not the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to an abnormal error process. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in step Sd4, when it is determined in step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped, a winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process for setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the bet number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set). In the regular bonus, 1 is set. In the normal game state, 3 is set.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and the replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not it is played (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a prescribed number (Se5), and if the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number, the process returns to the step of Se4. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to the Se8 step.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, settings before waiting to be made are performed (Se7), and the process proceeds to step Se8. In the setting before waiting for input, the input disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In step Se8, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se8 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. If it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se10), and the process proceeds to Se11.

  In step Se11, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se11, the process proceeds to the step of Se18. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter the token (Se12). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se12, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se13). If the value is not the specified number, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se14), and the process returns to the Se8 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se13, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se15), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se17), and the process returns to the step of Se8. .

  In step Se18, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se18, the process proceeds to the step of Se22. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se19).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se19, the process returns to the step of Se8, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, a medal flow path is used as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, and insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se20), and a setting at the start of the game is performed (Se21). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se21, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes. Note that the insertion impossible flag is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, and the detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game. The bet number setting is prohibited until the BET process. In addition, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing except when the big bonus is won or the big bonus is ended. (Including medals used for setting) are prohibited. When the big bonus is won or the big bonus is over, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effective when the game is finished (when the reel is stopped or when the medal payout is finished) without waiting for the BET process of the next game. Credits can be settled.

  In the step of Se22, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se22, the process proceeds to the step of Se27, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se23). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se23, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se24). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se24, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se25), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se26), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  In step Se27, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se27, the process proceeds to the step of Se32, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether the value of is a specified number (Se28). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se28, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se29). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se29, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se30), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se31), and the process returns to the step of Se28.

  In the step of Se32, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se33). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se8. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se33, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se35), and the process proceeds to the step of Se36. In step Se36, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se36, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled based on whether or not the bet amount settlement flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sf1).

  If the medal used for setting the bet amount in the step of Sf1 is not settled, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf2). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the original process.

  If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Sf2, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Insertion is prohibited (Sf3), and one medal payout process for performing payout control of one medal is performed (Sf4).

  In the medal payout process in step Sf4, if the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is not on, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to on. Then, the detection state of the payout sensor 35 is monitored, and when the payout sensor 35 detects the payout of one medal, it is determined that the medal is paid out, and the process proceeds to the next process. Further, when medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are jammed, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off, and an error code indicating a medal jammed error is set in the register. Then, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is once turned off, and no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even if the driving of the hopper motor 34 is retried several times. In this case, after an error code indicating a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper) is set in the register, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. The error processing due to the medal jamming error or the hopper error is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and after the cancellation, the processing returns to the top of the single medal payout processing.

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf4, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (Sf5), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf6). If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in step Sf6, the process returns to step Sf4. If the value of the credit counter is 0, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the driving is stopped. Later (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If it is the settlement of medals used for setting the number of bets in the step of Sf1, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout exit. As a route on the 9th side, the insertion of medals is prohibited (Sf3), and the same medal payout process as in step Sf4 is performed (Sf9).

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf9, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (Sf10), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Sf11). If the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the step of Sf11, the process returns to the step of Sf9. If the value of the BET counter is 0, the betting number settlement flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf12). After the drive state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the drive is stopped (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process, a random number acquisition process is performed (Sg1). In this random number acquisition process, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired based on the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42.

  In the random number acquisition process, as shown in FIG. 32, interrupts are first prohibited (Sg21). Next, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the value of the latched random number is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. The random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41G (Sg22).

  Next, the lower byte value and upper byte value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41G are exchanged with each other using the register for circle calculation (Sg23). Next, the value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41G is ORed with 8080h (Sg24). Further, the upper byte (15th to 8th bits) is shifted downward by 1 bit, and 1 is inserted into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the value stored in the general-purpose register 41G is acquired as a random number for internal lottery (Sf25). Then, after permitting the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sg21 (Sg26), the random number acquisition process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 31, after the random number acquisition process in the step of Sg2, the setting values stored in the setting value works 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c are read out and stored in the setting value used for the lottery, that is, the setting value work 1. A set value determination process is performed to determine whether or not the set value is appropriate (Sg2).

  In the set value determination process, as shown in FIG. 33, a set value determination process 1 (Sg51), a set value determination process 2 (Sg52), and a set value determination process 3 (Sg53) are sequentially executed.

  In the set value determination process 1 in the step of Sg51, as shown in FIG. 34, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game is appropriate. It is determined whether or not the value is within the range (Sg61). If the value read from the set value work 1 is not within the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg62). If the value read from the set value work 1 is a value in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 2 in step Sg52.

  In the set value determination process 2 in the step of Sg52, as shown in FIG. 35, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value set at the previous setting change (Sg71), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the values do not match, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg72), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 25, and the values read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the value matches, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 3 in step Sg53.

  In the set value determination process 3 in the step of Sg53, as shown in FIG. 36, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game (Sg81), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 3 If the two values do not match, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg82), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 25, the value read from the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 If the read value matches, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the setting value determination process, whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game is within an appropriate range, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the previous setting change are set. By determining whether or not the set value matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game, respectively. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery of the game is an appropriate value, and if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate value in at least one of the determinations, the above-described RAM abnormality error In the same manner as when the data in the RAM 41c is determined not to be normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the progress of the game is disabled. It has become as to be.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if the set value is appropriate in the set value determination process in step Sg <b> 2, the value stored in the set value work 3, that is, the set value used for the lottery in the previous game is set to the set value 1. The stored value, that is, the set value used for the lottery in the current game is updated (Sg3).

  Next, in correspondence with the current gaming state, the combinations registered as internal lottery targets in the gaming state-specific combination table of FIG. 4A are sequentially read (Sg4). It is determined whether or not the type of the read role is a regular bonus, a big bonus (1), or a big bonus (2) (Sg5). When the type of the combination read in the step of Sg5 is a regular bonus, a big bonus (1) or a big bonus (2), the type of the combination read to the RAM 41c in the previous game is the regular bonus, big bonus (1 ) Or a big bonus (2) winning flag has already been set, and it is determined whether or not it has been carried over without winning based on the winning flag (Sg6). If the type of the read combination is not the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), or the big bonus (2), the process proceeds to step Sg7 as it is.

  If the winning flag of the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is already set in the step of Sg6, the process returns to the step of Sg4 and further reads out the next registered combination in the gaming state-specific combination table. (Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2) are first registered in the gaming state-specific combination table, and the lottery process will not be terminated by this). Even if the type of the read combination is regular bonus, big bonus (1) or big bonus (2), if any winning flag of regular bonus, big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is not set , Go to Sg7 step.

  In the step of Sg7, the BET number (the number of bets) set in the step of Sd1 is further read, and the combination corresponding to the combination and the number of BETs read in the step of Sg4 is shared in the combination table in FIG. Get the setting status of. As a result, it is determined whether or not the common flag is set for the read combination and number of BETs (Sg8).

  If the common flag is set, the number of determination values stored at the address registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 4B is acquired for the read role and BET number (Sg9). And it progresses to the step of Sg11. If the common flag is not set, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the set value is acquired for the read combination and BET number (Sg10). And it progresses to the step of Sg11.

  In the step of Sg11, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg9 or Sg10 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sg12). When an overflow occurs in the step of Sg12, the winning flag of the combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sg13). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sg12, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations determined for the internal lottery for the gaming state of the game (Sg14). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to Sg4, and the process continues with the next combination registered in the gaming state-specific combination table being processed. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time has elapsed.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, the setting at the start of the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Si3). Then, referring to the table index, the table creation data is specified, and the stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning combination status of the game, and the stop status of other reels based on the specified table creation data Is created for each rotating reel (Si4), and the setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is made (Si5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes effective when the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the timer interruption process (main), which will be described later, when the origin passes. It becomes.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is detected (Si6). If no operation of any stop switch is detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time). Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Si7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected outside the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected outside the medal payout period) It is determined whether or not an error has occurred (Si8, Si9), and any error occurs in steps Si7 to Si9. If it is not determined, the flow returns to step Si6.

  Further, when it is determined that a loading error has occurred in the Si8 step, or when a dispensing error is determined in the Si9 step, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Si10 ), The process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 25 (Si11). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si6 step again.

  If it is determined in step Si7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 25 (Si13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in the Si6 step, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After obtaining and setting the workpiece corresponding to the stop reel (Si14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si15).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Si16). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the Si4 step, and all the reels are If it is stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  In the winning determination process, first, a stop symbol is referred to for each winning line (Sj1), and it is determined whether or not a combination corresponding to the gaming state is prepared (Sj2). If the combination corresponding to the gaming state is not complete in step Sj2, the process proceeds to Sj4. If the combination corresponding to the gaming state is aligned in step Sj2, a winning flag indicating the type of the combined combination is displayed. The RAM 41c is set (Sj3), and the process proceeds to step Sj4.

  In step Sj4, it is determined whether or not there is a winning line for which the winning determination has not been completed. If there is a winning line for which the winning determination has not been completed, the process returns to step Sj1 for the unprocessed winning line. If there is no winning line for which the determination of winning is not completed, the process proceeds to step Sj5.

  In step Sj5, it is determined whether or not a combination corresponding to the gaming state is arranged on the winning line based on whether or not a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c. If in the step of Sj5, there is no combination corresponding to the gaming state on the winning line, the winning determination process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step Sj5, when the combination corresponding to the game state is arranged on the winning line, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is replay (Sj6), and when the combination indicated by the winning flag is replay. Then, the replay game flag indicating the replay game is set in the RAM 41c (Sj7), the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag is not replayed in step Sj6, the number of bets in the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination indicated by the winning flag are set with reference to the role-specific table shown in FIG. (Sj8), go to step Sj9.

  In step Sj9, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is a big bonus (1) or a big bonus (2). If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj9 is neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2), the process proceeds to step Sj15, and the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj9 is the big bonus (1) or big bonus ( If 2), the big bonus medium flag indicating the big bonus medium is set in the RAM 41c, the winning flag of the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is cleared (Sj10), and the medal in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c. The value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total number of payouts is stored is initialized (set to 0) (Sj11), and the process proceeds to step Sj12.

  In step Sj12, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is a regular bonus. If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj12 is not a regular bonus, the process proceeds to step Sj15. If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj12 is a regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag indicating regular bonus and the regular bonus The regular bonus operation start flag indicating the start of the operation is set in the RAM 41c, the regular bonus winning flag is cleared (Sj13), the value of the regular bonus game number counter in which the number of regular bonus games is stored in the RAM 41c, and the regular bonus Initializes the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter that stores the number of times the prize is won (sets the value of the regular bonus game number counter to 12 and sets the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter) To be cleared), and then (Sj14), the process proceeds to step of Sj15.

  In step Sj15, if the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is cleared. Then, the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control details of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk1). If the regular bonus flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sk5. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the regular bonus game number counter, and if a win has occurred, 1 is added to the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter (Sk2). It is determined whether or not a bonus ending condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter is 8 (Sk3). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step Sk3, the process proceeds to the step Sk5. If the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4). ), Go to step Sk5.

  In step Sk5, it is determined whether or not the big bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in step Sk5, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the big bonus medium flag is set, the number of medals paid out for the game is added to the value of the big bonus medium payout counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter has reached 466 (Sk7). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sk7, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sk8) and proceed to Step Sk12.

  In step Sk9, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk9, the process proceeds to the step of Sk12. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk9, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk10), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate prize counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sk11), the process proceeds to step Sk12.

  In step Sk12, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sk12, the process proceeds to step Sk16. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk13). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk13, that is, when the regular bonus is ended and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk13, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk14). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14, that is, when the regular bonus is reactivated during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition for the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk16. In the step of Sk15, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to the step of Sk16.

  In the step of Sk16, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sk16, the process proceeds to the step of Sk19. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk16, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk17), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB signal (tw in FIG. 12) elapses (Sk18). move on.

  In step Sk19, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk19, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk19, whether the BB medium signal of the external output signals is in an ON state or not. Is determined (Sk20). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk20, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25 and the BB is in progress at the step of Sk20. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk21), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sk22) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sk23), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk22 elapses is performed (Sk24). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk25.

  In the effect waiting process, as shown in FIG. 40, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c (Sm1), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sm2). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sm4. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 30 is performed (Sm3), and then the process proceeds to step Sm4. . In step Sm3, it is determined whether or not the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed. If the production waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to step Sm2, and if the production waiting time has elapsed. Then, the production waiting process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In step Sk25, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sk25, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk25, whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON or not. Is determined (Sk26). When the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk26, that is, when the regular bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the regular bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28 and the RB is being processed in the step of Sk26. If the signal is not ON, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk27), and the process proceeds to step S28.

  In step Sk28, it is determined whether or not the BB signal in the external output signal is in an ON state. If the BB signal is not ON in the step of Sk28, the process proceeds to the step of Sk44. If the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk28, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sk29). If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk29, that is, if the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step of Sk44, and if the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk29, that is, the big bonus is ended. In this case, after the BB signal of the external output signal is turned off (Sk30), the production waiting time for the ending effect is set in the register (Sk31), and the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is enabled (Sk31). (Sk32), an effect waiting process (see FIG. 40) for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk31 elapses is performed (Sk33). After completion of the effect waiting process in the step of Sk33, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk34), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk35.

  In step Sk35, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is set to be invalid in the step of Sk35, the process proceeds to step Sk44, and if the stop function is set to be valid in the step of Sk35, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk37). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sk38). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. (Sk39), if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sk40), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sk38. When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk38, when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sk39, the operation proceeds to the step of Sk42, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sk40. If detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 30 is performed (Sk41), and the process returns to the step of Sk36.

  In step Sk42, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared, and it progresses to the step of Sk44.

  In step Sk44, after initialization 4 is performed to initialize unused areas and unused stack areas in the RAM 41c, the game end process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is inactive during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not in operation during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is not determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is not activated. If the bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the settlement of the credit is performed. Control will be performed. In addition, even when the settlement switch 10 is activated, detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. Even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, credit settlement control is performed.

  41 and 42 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, that is, timer interrupt 2 with reference to the minute counter value (Sn6), and if it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, it is a reel motor. Reel start processing (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sn21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sn4, it is further determined whether or not it is 3 by referring to the counter value for wake-up, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sn16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) Check for the passing of the position), detect the occurrence of a reel rotation error, check if the stop preparation is complete, and if the stop preparation is complete and is rotating at a constant speed, the spinning reel Based on the detection signal of various switches, these various switches satisfy the detection conditions. After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn19) for determining whether or not, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted (Sn21). Return to the process before inclusion.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 at the step of Sn16, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. Stop switch process (Sn22), the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted, and when it is time to stop, stop process (Sn23) to start braking by two-phase excitation, After executing the final stop process (Sn24) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start, the registers saved in the stack area in Sn2 are restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted. (Sn21), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the stop switch process, it is first determined whether or not a stop operation has been detected for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right (Sp1, Sp2). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, The stop switch process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If a stop operation of any of the reels is detected in the step Sp1, the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred to and the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel is set. The area number that becomes the stop position is specified from the area number including the number of steps (Sp3), and the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in the step of Sp3 is calculated. After the set number of steps is set (Sp4), the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 44 shows the control contents of the power interruption processing executed when the CPU 41a interrupts and executes the activation processing and the game processing when the interruption 2 occurs, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is input. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, where Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described below based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a start-up process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), after initialization of the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. (Sw1), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sw2). Then, the RAM parity of all storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sw3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sw4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sw4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step Sw5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In the step of Sw5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has been executed, the BB winning effect or ending effect is executed. Is determined to have reached the final stage (Sw6). If the final stage has been reached, the final stage control pattern is set (Sw7), and then the liquid crystal display is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling the various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Sw9), the interruption is permitted (Sw10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in the step of Sw5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in the step of Sw6, After setting the control pattern that was last executed before disconnection (Sw8), according to the set control pattern, various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED are controlled. The effect control process to perform is performed (Sw9), interruption is permitted (Sw10), and it transfers to a loop process.

  Further, if the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sw4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, after initializing the RAM 91c (Sw11) and setting the standby pattern as a control pattern (Sw12), In accordance with the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Sw9), and interruption is permitted (Sw10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (Ss1). If the command is not stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to Ss6. If the command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (Ss2), and the process proceeds to Ss3.

  In the step of Ss3, in accordance with the received command, continuous effect processing for executing the continuous effect such as continuous effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss4.

  In the step of Ss4, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not an effect pattern for continuous effect is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effect is not set, the ROM 91b An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss5.

  In step Ss5, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss6.

  In step Ss6, in accordance with the control pattern set in step Ss5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs is executed. Proceed to step.

  In step Ss7, after updating the values of various counters such as a random number counter in the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to step Ss8, where it is confirmed whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes zero so that the timer interrupt process (sub) is completed.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed in step Ss5 of the timer interrupt process (sub) by the CPU 91a.

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (St1). If the received command is a setting start command, the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step St1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (St3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (St4), the above-mentioned standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St5), the control pattern setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in the step of St3, it is determined whether or not the received command is a standby command (St6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a standby command in the step of St6, it is determined whether or not the received command is a stop command (St8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of a stop state (St9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (St7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of St8, when the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (St11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state (St12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (St13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack when the error occurs is set in step St13 ( St15), the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an error command in the step of St11, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout start command (St16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (St17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of St17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If the received command is not a payout start command in the step of St16, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout end command (St18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (St19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of St19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel is finished, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step St18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (St20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (St21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (St22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (St23). If the prize determination command indicates a prize other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning prize among the winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be set is set as a control pattern (St24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If it is determined that the winning other than the big bonus is not indicated in the step of St23, the process proceeds to St29.

  If the command received in the step of St20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a gaming state command (St25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to St29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (St26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (St27). If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (St28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step St27, the process proceeds to step St29.

  In step St29, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the regular bonus is activated simultaneously with the shift to the big bonus, and it is determined whether the regular bonus is activated for each game during the big bonus. When it is determined that the regular bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so that the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased most quickly during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus is activated in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the past. It is possible to increase the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the end condition is reached when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus reaches a specified value (466 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. When is established, since the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If there is no regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is inactive. If not, the regular bonus is activated, so the regular bonus will end despite the end of the big bonus. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. Alternatively, the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed for setting the number of bets from the total number of medals paid out) may be terminated when the prescribed number is reached. However, the process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus starts, the big bonus comes to an end when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus reaches a specified value (466 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions, for example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets from the total number of medals paid out) ) Reaches the specified value, the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular bonus is The big bonus end condition is satisfied by exiting, etc., or the big bonus ends by any of these conditions being satisfied Ken may be established.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may be controlled at all times while the big bonus is in operation. Even in this case, the big bonus is activated. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is not necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before the regular bonus is activated again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific winning or the like, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In this embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of stop controls in which stop positions (display results) are uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all reels are rotating in the table, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When any reel is already stopped, select a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel. The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, the internal winning state, the reel stop When all the conditions (and stopped positions (display results) of the stopped reels) are the same, reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, it is necessary to further select any one stop control table from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a lottery for reel control). Therefore, the control when stopping the reel is not complicated.

  Also, in this embodiment, at the start of reel rotation, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected for all reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. Each time the reels are controlled to stop, each time the reels stop, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stopped position of the stopped reel, that is, any one of the reels is stopped. The stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the stop positions of the stopped reels in the stopped state and the combination of the stop positions of the two stopped reels in the state where any two reels are stopped is selected and selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table. For example, any one reel When the reel is rotating, it selects a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel, and the selected stop control table. And when any of the reels is stopped (when two reels are stopped), a new stop control table is not selected and all reels are rotating. You may make it perform stop control of the remaining reels according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stopped.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any reel is already stopped, it is uniquely determined with respect to the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stopped position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table provided, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state, the reel stop status and the stop for each game state The reel stop control may be performed in accordance with a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the already-reel, and in this way, the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same, Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, if the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different, the Because there is a stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels further stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the other reel is rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely determined for the spinning reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels are stopped, A stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels The reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, for the spinning reel, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol varies, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol varies, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is defined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps (in this embodiment, 4 steps each having one symbol change) is calculated. Since the reel stop control is performed using the uniquely determined stop control table, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the area in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one (1) is won, area numbers 4 to 8 or area numbers 10 to 10 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is made at any timing within the 14 range, that is, when the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of 1 (1) cannot be pulled in even within a maximum of 4 frames, that is, 1 ( 1) If you cannot win a prize, if you do not win any of the roles by internal lottery (losing), it will not be derived.・ "Watermelon Bell", 8-10 symbols "Bell, Red 7, Bell" can be derived, if any bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (2) In the case of selection, the timing of any of the area numbers 6 to 8 or the area numbers 17 to 21 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is made at a timing that can not be drawn even within the range of 4 frames, that is, when one (2) could not be won, and when any of the roles is not won by internal lottery (losing) It is possible to derive the “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that will not be derived. By deriving the display results constituting these chances, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special winning is permitted.

  Also, in this embodiment, if any bonus is won by internal lottery and any other combination is not won, or if only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, 13 “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” or “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as display results, but if any of the roles are not won (losing), the region number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Not derived Therefore, when a bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (1) is won and a stop operation is performed at a timing when one (1) cannot be won, or one (2) When a stop operation is performed at a timing when only one of them is won and one (1) cannot be won, the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. However, since it is possible to derive the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived, the display result that constitutes the chance eye is derived, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus. be able to.

  In addition, if any winning combination is not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal time, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus by the internal lottery is not derived. Except for the case where is won, it is possible to derive chance chances by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In this embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a display result constituting a chance eye may be derived no matter what timing the stop operation is detected. No stop control table is created. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 The “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) are not derived on any winning line for a stop operation position (area number) that is smaller than when only one (1) is won. Whether a display result that constitutes a chance eye derived when the stop operation is performed at the timing is specified and whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 (2) The timing when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) are not derived on any winning line with respect to a smaller stop operation position (area number) than when only (2) is won The stop control table for specifying the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is performed may be created as the stop control table for the left reel. As a result, the bonus has been won by internal lottery, or one (1) or one (2) has been won, and at the timing when the winning one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. When a stop operation is performed, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived Thereby, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel In the state that is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the reels that have already stopped, the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived if any role is not won (losing) When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the left reel is still rotating. "Blue 7" composing one ball combination on the winning line of "No. 7", or "Blue 7" composing one (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel Although the handle is stopped, the stop operation was performed within the range where the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination cannot be pulled in on the winning line where “Blue 7” is stopped on the left reel. Or when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and 1 on the winning line of the left reel The “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the two sheets (2) is not stopped, or the “Red 7” symbol constituting the one (2) combination is stopped on the winning line of the left reel. When the stop operation is performed within a range where the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one (2) on the winning line where “Red 7” is stopped on the left reel cannot be drawn, If you are not elected (lost) Rukoto-free, and can be led to the center reel display results that make up the chance eyes.

  In addition, if any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. Regardless of the display result of a reel that has already stopped in the state, if the winning combination has not been won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived to the right reel. When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, so that it is on the winning line of the left reel. If the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes the combination of one (1) has not stopped, or at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the reel winning line is not stopped, and only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of two (1) on the winning line of the left reel has not stopped, and at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating Is already stopped, and the right reel is still rotating, and the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the winning line of the middle reel has not stopped. If the winning combination is not won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye can be derived to the right reel without being derived.

  That is, when one of the bonuses is won, or when one (1) or one (2) is won and one of the reels is stopped, and already one (1) or one It is possible to win one (1) or one (2) when one (2) cannot be won, or when any one reel is stopped. When one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be won because the stop operation was made at a timing when the combination of one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be derived, Since it is possible to derive the display results that make up the chance eyes that are not derived if they are not selected (losing), the display results that make up these chance eyes are derived. The occurrence of a prize It is possible to increase the player's expectation for that it is volume.

  In addition, only one (1) or one (2) is won, and the symbol constituting the combination of one (1) or one (2) on the winning line of the left reel is one of the winning lines. Even if it is not stopped up, one (1) or one (1) on the winning line of the left reel (1) because the stop operation was performed at a timing other than the timing at which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified. Even if the symbols constituting the combination 2) do not stop on any winning line and the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, the display result constituting the chance eye on the middle reel or the right reel Can be derived and the opportunity for deriving the display result constituting the chance eye is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the bonus can be effectively enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery or when only one (1) or one (2) is won, any one reel is stopped. Then, when one (1) or one (2) could not be won already, a stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, so that any combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye that is not derived even if a stop operation is performed at the same timing in the absence of the state, by deriving the display result that constitutes the chance eye, It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations are won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. In any case, except when one of the bonuses is won by internal lottery, it is possible to derive a chance by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In the present embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the chance of the stop operation is detected at any timing regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table is created in which the display result that constitutes the game is not derived. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), at least one reel The number of stop operation positions (area number) is smaller than when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state or only one (1) or one (2) is won. On the other hand, a stop control table in which display results constituting a chance eye are specified may be created as a left reel stop control table. As a result, a bonus has been won by internal lottery, or one (1) or one (2) has been won and at least one reel has stopped, and one (1) or one (2) When it is not possible to generate a prize, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In this embodiment, when the display result is derived for the left reel, the chance is not established, but when the display result is derived for any two reels or all reels (all winning combinations are The chance eye is established when the display result is derived to any one of the reels. For example, 8 to A display mode that is established only by deriving the 10th symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” may be applied as an opportunity.

  In addition, the maximum number of bets (3) that can be set for one game is set for one (1) and one (2) that can be used for deriving a chance when a prize cannot be won. This is a prize that involves paying out 3 or less (1) medals, which is the number of medals required to win. Even if it is not, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of 1 (1) and 1 (2) will not greatly affect the payout rate of the slot machine 1, For example, it is possible to increase the probability that one (1) and one (2) winnings are allowed to increase the chances of deriving chances, effectively increasing the player's expectation for the bonus. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) and one (2) is one which is necessary for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. Therefore, it is possible to hardly influence the payout rate of the slot machine 1.

  In this embodiment, one medal is paid out to the player with the winning of one (1) and one (2). The number of medals to be paid out is not limited to one, and the number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence of a specific prize that can derive an opportunity is preferably smaller, but can be set for at least one game If the maximum number of bets (3 in this embodiment) is less than the number of medals (three in this embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  Also, in this embodiment, when only one (1) or one (2) is won by internal lottery, it stops at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. The number of stop operation positions (region numbers) in which the number of drawing frames specifying the display result constituting the chance eye derived when an operation is detected is one (1) or one (2) Since the number of draw-in frames for which the display result for the symbols constituting the combination to stop on any of the winning lines is specified is greater than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) determined, one (1 ) Or in the case where only one (2) is won, a display result is derived in which the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or one (2) stop on one of the winning lines. Higher than 1 (1) The display result constituting the chance chance derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one (2) cannot be won is derived, and one (1) is obtained by internal lottery. Or when only one (2) is elected, one symbol (1) rather than the symbols constituting the combination of the one (1) or one (2) being derived on any winning line ) Or a player's expectation for the occurrence of a bonus, because it is easier to derive a display result that constitutes an opportunity to be derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing when one (2) cannot be won. A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery or when one (1) is won, the “Blue 7” symbol is drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 17 and 18 among the timings at which it can be stopped on the winning line, it is not derived when any combination is not won. If the 15th to 17th symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, if one (1) combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, a display result that will lead to a chance chance will be derived. When either bonus is won by internal lottery or one (2) is won, either “Red 7” symbol is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which it can be stopped on the winning line, it will not be derived if any combination is not won. 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, if the combination of 1 sheet (2) is not finally arranged on the winning line, the display result that leads to the chance eye is derived. The symbols that make up one (1) or one (2) combination are derived on one of the winning lines, and one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at the timing is not derived, the derived display result may be awarded one (1) or one (2). Possible If the display result of stop operation constitutes a second chance to be derived even if they are detected at timing, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus generation.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or only one (1) is won, the timing within the range of the area numbers 17 and 18 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is detected, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols constituting the chance chance is derived as a display result, and one of the bonuses is won by internal lottery or one When only (2) is elected, when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the range of the region numbers 12 and 13 shown in FIG.・ "Bell" is derived as the display result, but when no role is won in the normal game state (losing), it stops at any timing within the range of area numbers 17 and 18. Even if an operation is detected, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is not derived as a display result, and a stop operation is detected at any timing within the range of area numbers 12 and 13 No. 8-10 symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are not derived as the display result, so the bonus is won by internal lottery or only one (1) or one (2) When a winning operation is performed and a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won, the same timing will be used if no winning combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes an opportunity that is not derived even if a stop operation is performed, one of the symbols constituting one (1) or one (2) combination is either On the winning line Derived even if the display result that constitutes the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) cannot be won is not derived. If the display result is a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won, the bonus can be generated. The expectation of the player can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, since the common “blue 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and the symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2), The display result of the 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, the chance eye to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) can be won, is derived. Thus, if the big bonus (2) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing targeting the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the big bonus (2) on the middle reel and the right reel. It becomes possible to stop the combination of the big bonus (2) on the winning line and win the game. Similarly, since the common “red 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (2) and the symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1), 8-10. Even if a stop operation is detected at the timing at which the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, one (2) can be won, a display result constituting a chance eye is derived. If the regular bonus or big bonus (1) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing aimed at the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the middle reel, and the right reel The target is the “BAR” symbol that constitutes the regular bonus combination or the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the big bonus combination. By performing the stop operation at timing, it is possible to prize is stopped in the game a combination of regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the pay line.

  The present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, as a symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and one (2), a symbol different from the symbol constituting the bonus combination is applied. Even in this case, one (1) or one (2) configuration symbol is derived on one of the winning lines, and one (1) or one (2) is won. Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing that cannot be performed, the derived display result is one sheet (1) or one sheet (2). The display result that configures the chance item including the configuration symbol of the symbol, that is, the chance item that is derived even when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won. Display result If so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Also in this case, the display result constituting the chance item including one (1) or one (2) constituent symbols includes the symbols constituting the bonus combination, that is, one (1). Alternatively, it is preferable that the display configuration is such that one (2) configuration symbol and the bonus configuration symbol both stop on the winning line. Even in this case, one (1) or one (2) Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing when a winning can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived is derived, so that if the bonus is won, the middle reel and the right reel are also won The bonus combination selected in the game can be stopped on the winning line to win a prize by performing a stop operation at the timing of the symbols that make up the bonus combination. The ability.

  Also, in this embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal game state (losing), one (1) or one (2) is won regardless of the timing when a stop operation is detected. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing that can be executed, a stop control table is created in which a display result that constitutes a chance eye to be derived is not derived. If no combination is won in the state (losing), than if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state or only one (1) or one (2) is won A chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won with respect to a small number of stop operation positions (region numbers). May be created a stop control table display result is identified as a stop control table of the left reel. As a result, when a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or when one (1) or one (2) is won, one (1) at a higher rate than when no part is won by an internal lottery ( 1) or 1 (2) Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) can be won, 1 (1) Or, when symbols constituting a combination of one (2) are derived on one of the winning lines, and a stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won Even when the display result constituting the chance chance to be derived is not derived, the stop operation is detected at a timing at which the derived display result can win one (1) or one (2). Case If the display results that make up the chance eyes are also derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, a display mode (region number 14) in which the 16th “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) stops at one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. -16, 15-17, 16-18) and the display mode (area) in which the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 constituting the combination of one sheet (2) stops at one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel No. 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) are arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, respectively, and the stop operation position that can aim at the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol at the same time Since it does not exist, when one of the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or the symbol constituting the combination of one (2) is always aimed at stopping the reel, one (1), One of the two (2) can always be awarded Since it becomes impossible to perform a stop operation at a timing at which the other combination can be won, and in this case, a chance is derived, so 1 (1), 1 (2) Even if the reel stop operation is always performed aiming at one of the roles, it is possible to make the chance chance appear appropriately. In this case, the other one of the one (1) and one (2) Since it is impossible to determine whether the bonus has been won or whether the bonus has been won, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus by the appearance of the chance.

  In addition, since one (1) and one (2) have the same winning probability and the same number of medals for winning a prize, one combination of one (1) and one (2) Since there is little merit to stop the reel by performing only this, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the stop operation aiming at one of the one (1), one (2), stop at various positions There is a high possibility that the operation is performed, and the display results can be varied.

  In the present embodiment, in the left reel, the 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2), the big bonus (1), and the regular bonus (1) is the upper and middle stages of the left reel. , The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at one of the lower tiers, the combination of one sheet (1) and the combination of big bonus (2) No. 16 “blue 7 ”The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) where the symbol stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel is arranged in excess of 4 frames, each of which is the maximum drawing range. Since there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Red 7” symbol and “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, the stop operation is aimed at the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol is derived on the winning line. Can not be made and The “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the event is derived, and the Big Bonus (1) or Regular Bonus (1) cannot be won in the end, and other roles If you didn't win, you won't know if you couldn't win one (1) or you couldn't win the big bonus (2) corresponding to the other "Blue 7" symbol, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that make up the “Blue 7” symbol, the “Red 7” symbol cannot be derived on the winning line, and constitute the chance eye When the big bonus (2) could not be won, and no other combination was won, the other (2) could not be won. Legion corresponding to “Red 7” symbol Either because the error bonus or big bonus (1) was not able to prize winning is not known, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (1) are respectively configured by the same “blue 7” symbol, The special symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (2) are each composed of the same “red 7” symbol. And the specific symbol are composed of separate symbols, and at least the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) or the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) A display mode in which one of the symbols stops on the winning line (a display mode in which the “red 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol stops in either the upper, middle, or lower level), The display mode (display mode in which the specific symbol stops at either the upper, middle, or lower level) where the specific symbols that make up the combination (1) or (2) stop on the winning line is the maximum pull-in respectively. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained as long as the frame is arranged beyond the 4 frames.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance is derived. In other words, since the continuous performance is executed in relation to the derivation of the chances that are likely to be won by the bonus, the player's expectation for the bonus is expressed by both the reel display result and the performance related to the display result. Can be increased.

  Further, when the reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely identified from the stop operation position, for example, the player performs the stop operation at a timing other than the stop operation position at which the chance eye can be derived. In some cases, such as when playing a game, the rate at which chances are derived is extremely reduced, but in this embodiment, a continuous production lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and the continuous production lottery is performed. Even in the case of winning, continuous production is executed. That is, even when the chance is not derived, the continuous production is executed when the continuous production lottery is won. For this reason, even when the rate at which chance chances are derived is extremely reduced, the continuous performance is appropriately executed, so that the player's expectation on the bonus can be effectively increased.

  In this embodiment, when the chance chance is derived, that is, when the combination of the display results of all reels becomes the chance eye, a continuous effect, that is, a specific effect is executed. When applying the chance that is established when one of the reels is stopped, if any one of the reels is stopped and the chance is established, the specific effect is executed from that point. Anyway.

  Also, in this embodiment, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is applied as a specific effect indicating the possibility of winning any of the bonuses, and the bonus is won over a plurality of games as well as one game. However, for example, an effect that is executed only for the next game with a chance chance may be applied as a specific effect, or from when the chance eye is derived. An effect executed until the next game starts may be applied as the specific effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the symbol to be stopped is selected according to the internal winning state and the timing of the stop operation, and the display result is derived on the reel. The In other words, winning is generated not only by the internal winning state but also by the player's technical intervention of operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, collateral for restraint will be secured. In addition, regardless of the time that the player has not operated the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected is detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Since the display result is derived to the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, the player does not operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Thus, the display result is not derived only by the contingency element that time has passed, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a type of winning combination, a small role accompanied by paying out medals, a re-playing role that does not require consumption of medals for the number of bets in the next game, and a transition of the gaming state. A special role is provided. The special role is accompanied by a transition of the game state and depends on the game state at that time, so it cannot be said to be a basic role. The playability of slot machines is not just playing a game, but the player earns medals based on the game results, so the small role that involves paying out medals by winning a prize is the most basic role. It can be said. Here, there are JAC, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell as types of small roles, but in any gaming state other than JAC that wins with a small probability in the regular bonus Is also stipulated as the type of winning role. In this way, by defining the basic small combination as a winning combination regardless of the gaming state, the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  In the regular bonus game state, a small role (especially a bell) is won with a high probability, and a large number of medals can be obtained, so the player's expectation is high. This regular bonus is not only transferred during the big bonus, but also when the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state. For this reason, even when the player is in the normal gaming state, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the regular bonus, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in the regular bonus, in addition to the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell that are also set in the normal gaming state, JAC is also set as a small role. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation in the regular bonus can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the regular bonus, in addition to the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), the JAC display mode determined to be a prize in addition to the small part of the bell, it is configured by a combination of “bell-bell-watermelon” It is not used as a display mode for other roles. For this reason, the relationship between the display mode derived as the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the winning combination is clarified, and the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  Further, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped after a maximum of 4 frames are drawn after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, and the symbols to be stopped can be selected from a range of 5 symbols. it can. Here, the symbols “bell” and “replay” are always arranged at intervals of 4 symbols or less on the left, middle and right reels, and the symbol “watermelon” is always 4 on the right reel. The bells, replays, and JACs constituted by these symbols will not be missed when they are selected. In particular, the bells in the regular bonus will be won with a very high probability, but this can not be missed. , You can easily advance the game.

  As described above, the types of winning combinations that are subject to internal lottery for each gaming state are registered in the winning combination table by gaming state, but the number of judgment values that determine the winning probability of each combination is referenced from the determining table. Stored in the address. In the role table, the number of pachinko balls when a winning of each role occurs is also registered.

  In the role-specific table, the number of medals to be paid out is registered according to the number of bets, and when a cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), or Bell wins, a medal is paid out according to the number of bets. The number of sheets is set. Here, the number of bets in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the number of bets in the normal gaming state is fixed at 3. As a result, an appropriate number of medals can be paid out according to the gaming state simply by acquiring the number of medals to be paid out according to the number of bets. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when setting the payout number, the processing steps in the winning determination process are simplified. In addition, since the number of bets 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has more payouts at the time of winning than the number of bets 3, the player's expectation in the regular bonus is further enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

  In the role-specific table, for each of the cherries, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell that are determined as winning combinations in any gaming state, the storage address of the judgment value number is registered for each bet number. Therefore, the number of determination values is acquired according to the number of bets. Here, the number of bets in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the number of bets in the gaming state other than the regular bonus is fixed at 3. Thereby, even if only the number of determination values is acquired according to the number of bets, it is possible to perform an internal lottery of cherry, one (1), one (2), and a bell with a winning probability according to the gaming state. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when acquiring the determination value number, the processing steps in the internal lottery are simplified. Moreover, since the bet number 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has a higher probability of winning the bell than when the bet number is 3, the player's expectation in the regular bonus is further enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. Can do.

  In addition, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value. For the winning combination, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, even if the target number of the internal lottery is the same as the set bet number and the address storing the number of judgment values referenced according to the set value is different, it is stored at a different address. There may be a case where the number of determination values is the same.

  In general, in the development stage, the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of determination values according to the set values for at least some of the combinations (that is, adjusting the winning probability of internal lottery). As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by simulation becomes the same regardless of the setting value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b by the same address allocation as the address allocation in the development stage, It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  Further, the storage address of the determination value number of each combination registered in the combination table varies depending on the number of bets (1 or 3). For example, the number of determination values stored at different addresses May be the same.

  In the development model, it is normal to perform simulation while finely adjusting the judgment value data according to the number of bets (the same as when the initial number of judgment values is different) There may be cases). Here, even if the number of decision values adjusted by the simulation becomes the same regardless of the number of bets, the number of decision values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as the address assignment in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each role referred from the role-specific table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether or not the result of the addition overflows, Judgment is made on whether or not there is a win. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination as it is. In addition, when generating the winning determination table before the actual winning determination is performed, the loop processing is required twice. However, according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing may be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  In the present embodiment, the random numbers for internal lottery acquired by the random number acquisition process are not used as they are by the sampling circuit 43 from the random number generation circuit 42, but are used after being processed by software. Yes. The random number generation circuit 42 generates a random number by updating at a high speed with the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a. It will be lost.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, since the number of determination values corresponding to each combination is sequentially added to the random value for internal lottery, each combination is determined as winning as shown in FIGS. The random number value for the internal lottery to be fixed will be hardened. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming as much as possible by losing the periodicity of the random numbers for internal lottery by processing by software and varying the values.

  Moreover, the frequency of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation circuit 42a for updating the values of the counters 42b and 42c of the random number generation circuit 42 is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a, and is not an integral multiple. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the update of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 to be synchronized with the process performed by the CPU 41a. In addition, by increasing the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a, the update speed of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 can be made extremely fast.

  On the other hand, the processing of the random number by software only needs to replace the upper byte and the lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43. Therefore, even a relatively large random number of 16 bits does not increase the load required for processing necessary to lose periodicity and can be easily acquired. Since a large random number can be acquired in this way, the probability setting in the internal lottery can be finely performed.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the BB winning effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. As long as possible, medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) can be returned even during the period when setting bets is prohibited. Reflecting the will of the player, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received. Thus, for example, in a game in which a big bonus prize has occurred, before starting the big bonus game accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize, a part of the medal memorized as the credit is given as a prize (for example, a soft drink or a cigarette). Etc.), but it is possible to receive a medal return reflecting such a player's will.

  In addition, when a big bonus prize is generated, an effect at the time of the BB prize indicating that the big bonus prize has occurred is executed, so that the player's interest in shifting to the big bonus accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Also, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until the ending effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. Can be returned as a credit (including medals used to set the number of bets), so as much as possible to reflect the player's will, It is possible to receive a medal for the credit stored as owned by the player. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, since the ending effect indicating that the big bonus has ended is executed at the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the end of the big bonus can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, even in a game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, even if the game is controlled to be stopped, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, the game ends, and the store clerk performs a reset operation. Medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) are returned even during the period when setting of bets is forbidden until the stoppage state is released Therefore, it is possible to receive medals for credits stored as owned by the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, after a determination is made that the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is terminated, a power interruption occurs in the period until the BB prize presentation effect waiting time elapses. When the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas the BB prize is won. When power interruption occurs in the stage before the time effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the start of the BB winning effect, the power is cut off before the end of the BB winning effect, and after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received during execution of the time effect, the current BB winning effect is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so the BB winning effect is troublesome for the player. The control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant in spite of the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, and there is a discrepancy between both control states. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and backs up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage at the next activation. If so, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the fact that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect is returned to the final stage state. Yes. For this reason, when power interruption occurs in a state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed is not executed from the beginning after the return, so the BB winning effect is performed. Can be more effectively prevented from becoming annoying for the player.

  Also, for example, during the period from the determination of the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred until the production waiting time for the production at the BB winning has elapsed, credit settlement is executed, and medals are being paid out along with this settlement. If a payout error occurs and the payout error is canceled, the bet number is set when the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error has elapsed from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect. When the prohibition is canceled and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning performance reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled. The BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the BB winning effect is started, the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect is finished, and when the error state is canceled after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. If a new command is received during the execution of the BB winning effect, the effect based on the newly received command is executed after the BB winning effect being executed is cancelled, and the BB winning effect is displayed by the player. Can be prevented, and the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, and there is a discrepancy between the two control states. It can be prevented from occurring.

  In the sub control unit 91, the sub control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning is performed. If the data indicating that the time effect is in the elapsed stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, BB The production at the time of winning is to return in the final stage. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, a power interruption occurs after the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus has been established, and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses. In the case of returning, when the time excluding the time already passed before power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the prohibition on setting of the bet amount is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted On the other hand, if a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, when the ending effect is started and then interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then returned from the power interruption, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When the command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player, and the main Although the control state on the control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and if the fact that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage at the next start-up is backed up, If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is returned to the final stage. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs when the ending effect has reached the final stage, the ending effect that was being executed will not be executed from the beginning after the return, so the ending effect is troublesome for the player. Can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, after the end of the game for which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined and the waiting time for the ending effect is over, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production At that point, the prohibition on setting of the number of bets is lifted and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, whereas a payout error occurs at the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, it is controlled to an error state before the ending effect ends, and when the error state is canceled after that, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In the sub control unit 91, the sub control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning is performed. If the data indicating that the time effect is in the elapsed stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, BB The production at the time of winning is to return in the final stage. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the power interruption occurs in the period until the waiting time for the ending effect is over. When returning, after the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the stop state is released. The prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released at that time, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas a power outage occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and then returns The ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, the power is interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then the ending effect is executed from the beginning when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the command indicating the start of the state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the in-stop notification is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player, Although the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied is determined and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production After the elapse of time, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is also released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. If a payout error occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect It is performed from the initial course stages. For this reason, after an ending effect is started, if an error occurs before the ending effect ends, and then the error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a command indicating the start of the stop state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the stop notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the ending effect from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the time required to execute the progress stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the time until the transition to the final stage is determined as the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the end of the game. Since the set time is shorter than the time when the setting of the bet number is prohibited, the BB winning that was executed after returning to the final stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect was cut off. Even when the time effect and the ending effect are executed from the beginning, the overlapping period between the period when the BB winning effect and the ending effect are executed and the period until the prohibition of the setting of the bet number is canceled, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the control states of both the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, before the BB winning effect and the ending effect waiting time elapses, an error occurs and the BB winning effect and the ending effect are awaited while the error is being controlled. The timing of the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect is resumed from the time when the timing of the time is interrupted and the error state is canceled. The time measurement may be performed without interruption even while it is controlled to the error state, and in this way, when the error state is canceled, the prohibition of the setting of the bet amount is canceled, The bet number can be set as early as possible and the bet number set in this state cancels the resumed BB winning effect and ending effect. Therefore, these effects are not bothersome for the player, but the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, It is possible to prevent a difference in state from occurring.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If the determination process 1 is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work 1 is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the value stored in the set value work 1, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6, so the value stored in the set value work 1 is 1 to 6. If the value is not in the range, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the setting value is not appropriate due to data corruption, the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (in general, the setting change operation) Since the game is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery and the setting change A set value determination process 2 for determining whether or not the set set value matches is executed for each game, and a value read from the set value work 1 and a value read from the set value work 2 are Even if they do not match, it is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal RAM error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the setting value after the change is stored in each of the setting value work 1 and the setting value work 2 when the setting is changed. Normally, the value stored in the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are stored. The values stored in the table should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been rewritten illegally, and in this case, the progress of the game is disabled. Become.

  In addition, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the internal lottery of the previous game. The set value determination process 3 for determining whether or not the set value matches is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 does not match the value read from the set value work 3 Even in this case, the game is controlled in an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the set value used for the internal lottery is stored in the set value work 3, and normally the value stored in the set value 1 (the set value used in the internal lottery of the current game) and The value stored in setting value 3 (the setting value used in the previous internal lottery of the game) should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been illegally rewritten. In this case, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, in order to restart the game when there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation that is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error state. Cheating can be effectively prevented.

  If there is a possibility that the setting value has been rewritten illegally, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, Since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, six values in the range of 1 to 6 are applied as the setting values used for the internal lottery, that is, the setting values that determine the winning probability of the internal lottery. However, the setting values are limited to this. Any setting value that can select and set at least a plurality of setting values may be used. For example, a setting value that can select two steps of high / low and a setting value of three steps in the range of 1 to 3 are set. Selectable setting values may be applied. Furthermore, the set values work 1 to 3 in the RAM 41c store the values 1 to 6 themselves as values indicating these set values, but any value that can specify the set value may be stored. For example, 0 to 5 (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual setting value) corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 may be stored in the setting value works 1 to 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, the setting value determination processing 1 for determining whether or not the value read from the setting value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, the value read from the setting value work 1, and the reading from the setting value work 2 Set value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, a set value determination for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match All of the processing 3 is executed to determine whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery is appropriate. By performing any one of these setting value determination processings 1 to 3, the internal lottery is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the set value used for the setting is appropriate. For example, only the set value determination process 1, only the set value determination process 2, or only the set value determination process 3 is performed. Any one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 to be performed To perform the processing, or the like may be used.

  Further, any one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 is performed for each game, and the remaining one process or all of the remaining processes are performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, every predetermined number of games, at the end of the bonus, Or two of the set value determination processes may be performed for each game, and the remaining one process may be performed with a predetermined opportunity.

  In this embodiment, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are executed for each game. However, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are not performed for each game, but the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are performed for a predetermined number of games. It may be performed every time or in a game of a specific period (such as a period excluding the bonus period).

  Further, in this embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 for determining whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is appropriate are executed. Any timing may be used, for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 (the set value read for use in the internal lottery of the current game). The timing at which the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 is any timing until the game ends (for example, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, Etc.) at the end of the withdrawal.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in two areas of the set value work 1 and the set value work 2. In the set value determination process 2, the value stored in the set value work 1 and the setting are stored. It is determined whether or not the value stored in the value work 2 matches. If it does not match, it is determined that the value is not an appropriate setting value, but the setting value is stored in three or more storage areas when the setting is changed. In the set value determination process 2, it is determined whether or not all the values stored in these three or more storage areas match. If they do not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value. Also good.

  Furthermore, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in three or more storage areas. In the set value determination process 2, whether or not the values stored in these three or more areas match a predetermined number or more (for example, 5 Setting values are stored in one storage area, and it is determined whether or not three or more of the values match, and if a predetermined number or more does not match, it may be determined that the setting values are not appropriate. In this way, even if a part of the data indicating the setting value stored at the time of changing the setting is lost due to noise or the like, it is erroneously determined that the setting value is not appropriate and the progress of the game is disabled. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, only the set values used for the internal lottery of the previous game are stored in the set value work 3, and in the set value determination process 3, the values stored in the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 are stored. Whether the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game is the same If not, it is determined that the setting value is not appropriate, but the setting value used for the internal lottery of each game is stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting value determination processing 3 It is determined whether or not the set value used for the lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the game before the previous game (for example, a game before a predetermined number of games). Appropriate set value It may be determined that there is no.

  In addition, the setting values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the setting value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game It may be determined whether or not all the set values used in the internal lottery of the game match, and if they do not match, it is determined that the set values are not appropriate.

  Furthermore, the set values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the set values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the set value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game are stored. Whether or not each set value used for the internal lottery of the game matches a predetermined number or more (for example, each set value used for the internal lottery of the past five games is stored in five storage areas, of which 3 It is also possible to determine whether or not two or more values match, and if it does not match a predetermined number or more, it may be determined that the setting value is not an appropriate setting value. Even when a part of the data indicating the set value stored at the time is lost, it is possible to prevent the game from being disabled due to an erroneous determination that the set value is not appropriate.

  In this embodiment, when determining the winning of the winning in the internal lottery process, if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value in the set value determining process, the RAM abnormal error state is controlled. However, when the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), a prize is won with a probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, the set value 1). You may make it determine the winning of.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized for each game. It is possible to prevent malicious programs from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. Even if an attempt is made to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to be resident. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Further, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, an area where the saved data should be stored can be compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that configures the main control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything that can be initialized is acceptable.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are set for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 that are initialized in different areas according to each initialization condition, and any of these four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, the unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, the control state of the main control unit 41 can be prevented from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error occurs due to a RAM error, and the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on. Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the in-use stack area of the RAM 41c. Since the initialization 1 for initializing is performed, a malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the interruption interrupt process, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. After that, adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored, and in addition to the determination of whether the RAM parity is 0 at the start-up, the destructive diagnosis data Is determined to be normal, and the RAM 41c is determined to be normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port Before performing the conversion, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  In other words, the voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the main control unit 41, and the CPU 41a can execute the power interruption interrupt process when the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this. When a power interruption is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a is interrupted for a longer time than necessary due to the erroneous detection of the power interruption. More than necessary Possible to prevent the load is applied to.

  In addition, other interrupts are prohibited during the execution of the power interruption interrupt process and the timer interrupt process (main). For example, the voltage drops during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main). Even when a signal is input, double interruptions do not occur, and it is possible to prevent the processing load of the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  If the interrupt timing of the power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt processing (main) are simultaneous, that is, if interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 Priority is given to the power interruption interrupt process, and if interrupt 2 occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process (main) ends. Since interrupt processing is performed and power interruption interrupt processing is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interrupts, it is ensured that power interruption interrupt processing is performed before the CPU 41a stops driving. It can be carried out.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original process. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even when unused interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. It is possible to prevent such troubles.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. In addition, a stop control table is created for each spinning reel, but the internal control state for each gaming state and the stop control table for each reel stop state (and stopped stop position) are stored in the ROM 41b in advance. Based on the table index, it is possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop state of the reel, and when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel Refer to the table index when the reels that have stopped and are still rotating still remain. By Le may be set a stop control table.

  In the above embodiment, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (one symbol) are defined for one reel, and the stop control table corresponds to each area (area number). Then, the reel is used by using the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to the area where one symbol varies. For example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely set for each area of less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, for every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The reel stop control may be performed using a predetermined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor, and the stop operation position Against can be further diversified the stop position.

  Moreover, in the said Example, among the some stop control tables which defined the number of drawing | drawing tops with respect to a stop operation position uniquely, each internal winning state of each game state, the reel stop condition (and stop position stopped) A stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the selected stop control table and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. Is used in place of the stop control table, and when the stop operation is detected, the stop position specifying table is referred to and the reel is stopped at the stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position. You may do it.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the selected number of pull-in frames, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. It is also possible to perform kicking control (so-called control method control) in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. Since the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) by performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel by using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected and its control is performed. The reel stop control is performed according to the pattern, but at least a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. If it is good.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the determination value number storage area | region of RAM41c in which the determination value number used for an internal lottery is memorize | stored shall memorize | store the determination value number in each case using a 2 byte area | region. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common. The same applies to the number of determination values for the bet number. For example, the bet numbers 1 and 2 may be common and the bet number 3 may be individual.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the number of bets for the same combination at the same set value is stored at a different address for each of the bets (1 or 3). That is, for the same combination at the same set value, even if the number of judgment values referred to according to the number of bets is the same, it is stored separately, but the combination with the same winning probability regardless of the number of bets For the role that makes the determination value number storage address common, or for the role that makes the winning probability the same regardless of the setting value and the number of bets, the address of the determination value number storage address is made common In this way, by storing the number of determination values in common, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for that purpose.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination according to the game situation is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows, the winning combination is won. It was supposed to be judged. On the other hand, a winning determination table in which a determination value for determining each combination as winning is determined for each game in accordance with the number of determination values for each combination according to the game situation, and the internal random number for internal lottery acquired It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing this value with the determination value of each combination. In addition, a winning determination table in which determination values for determining each winning combination are stored in advance in the ROM 41b, and an internal lottery value is compared by comparing the acquired internal random number value with the determination value for each winning combination. It is good also as what performs.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of paid out medals can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout number is 7, but when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the payout number may be more than seven. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of payouts may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  In the above embodiment, the special combination and the small combination or replaying game are not won simultaneously in one internal lottery, but the special combination and the small combination or replaying in one internal lottery. You may make it win a role simultaneously.

  For example, a role-specific table for a small role and a re-playing role in which the storage destination addresses for the small role and re-playing role are registered, and a role-specific table for a special role in which the storage destination address for the number of judgment values for the special role is registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, a lottery for a small role and a replaying role that refers to a role-specific table for a small role and a replaying role, and a role-specific table for a special role The lottery of the special role to be referred to is separately performed, and the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the replay role is registered in the special-purpose role table. Based on the number of judgment values stored in the address area, the range of judgment values for each small role, replaying role, and special role, and the small role, replaying role, and special role are won in duplicate. To be able to identify the range of judgment values In other words, it may be configured such that a small role or re-playing role and a special role can be won at the same time, and in such a configuration, even if a winning of a small role or re-playing role occurs as a result of the game, Since it is not denied that the generation of a special combination having a higher degree of advantage than that of a small combination or re-playing combination is allowed, the player's expectation for the generation of the special combination can be maintained even in such a situation.

  Also, in this case, after the special role is established, that is, in the state where the winning flag of the special role is carried over, a plurality of special roles are duplicated by performing the lottery of the small role and the re-playing role only. I won't win. Furthermore, since the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role can be shared before and after the special role is established, the internal lottery in the normal gaming state can be simplified, and in the state where the special role is carried over after the special role is established. Since it is only necessary to perform the lottery of the small combination and the re-playing combination, the processing efficiency of the internal lottery in the state where the winning of the special combination is carried over becomes high. On the other hand, even after the special role is established, both the lottery of the small role and the re-playing role and the special role lottery will be performed, and if the special role is won by the special role lottery, the winning will be treated as invalid Even in this case, multiple special roles will never be won.

  In the above configuration, after the special role is established, that is, in the state where the special role winning flag is carried over, the value of the determination value range in which the special role is won alone is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. If the value of the range of judgment values for winning a combination of small roles and special roles is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is determined that only the small role is won, Even if multiple special roles are not won, it will be lost even when the value of the judgment value range in which small and special roles are won in duplicate is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate. In addition, after the special role is established, the role-specific table in which data that can specify the range of the judgment value that the special role wins alone and the judgment value range that the small role and the special role wins are not registered, In other words, the internal lottery process may be performed by the role-specific table in which only data that can specify the range of the determination value that the re-game player wins and data that can specify the range of the determination value that the small role wins are registered. Well, even in this case, multiple special roles will never win.

  In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role It may be possible to specify only a range of judgment values for winning a small role and a replaying role alone, or a range of judgment values for winning a combination of a small role or a replaying role and a special role. According to the configuration, even if a small role or re-playing role is won as a result of the game, it is not denied that the special role is won, so even in this situation, the player's expectation for winning the special role Can be sustained.

  Also, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the small role or the replaying role, Register the storage address of the number of decision values corresponding to only the game combination, and in the internal lottery, add the number of decision values of each combination referenced from the combination table to the internal random number obtained If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the small role or replaying role If the result of the addition is overflowed, the winning combination of both the special role and the small role or the replaying role is judged, and the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the small role or the replaying role is overflowed Is a small role or replaying role It is possible to make a configuration in which a special role and a small role or a re-playing role can be won at the same time, and even if such a configuration is made, a general role will be won as a result of the game. Even in such a situation, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special role with a higher degree of advantage than the small role or the re-game player is allowed, so even in such a situation, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special role is maintained. be able to.

  Further, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the winning combination is made using the same loop process regardless of the type of combination or combination of combinations, so that individual determination is performed according to the type of combination as described above. The capacity of the processing program for executing the lottery process can be further reduced than the case.

  In the above configuration, after the special role is established, that is, in the state where the special role winning flag is carried over, the value of the determination value range in which the special role is won alone is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. If the value of the judgment value range in which a small role or re-playing role and a special role are won in duplicate is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, only the small role or re-playing role is determined. As a result of the determination of winning, a plurality of special roles will not be won. In addition, after a special combination is established, it is determined that the game is lost even if the value of the judgment value range in which the small combination or replay combination and the special combination are won is obtained as a random number for internal lottery. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won. In addition, after the special role is established, data is registered that can specify the range of judgment values that the special role will win independently and the range of judgment values that the small role or re-playing role and special role will win. The internal lottery process is performed by the role-specific table in which only the data that can specify the range of the judgment value won by the re-playing role and the data that can specify the range of the judgment value that the small role wins are registered. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate.

  Also, from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that the re-playing role or small role wins alone, the small role or re-playing role and the special role overlap. It may be possible to specify only the range of judgment values to be won, and according to such a configuration, even if a small role wins as a result of the game, it is not denied that a special role is won. Even in such a situation, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  In addition, when a small role or re-playing role and a special role can be won at the same time, for example, a big bonus and cherry, a big bonus and a bell, etc. You may be able to win. Furthermore, in this case, the big bonus and the bell are set to be larger than the judgment value range in which the big bonus and the bell are won, and the big bonus is set to be larger. The probability of winning the big bonus and cherry at the same time may be higher than the probability of winning the bell at the same time, and this way, when the cherry wins than when the bell wins However, since the possibility of winning at the same time as the big bonus increases, the expectation for winning the special role can be changed depending on the type when the small role or replaying role is won. Can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, the entire high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is replaced with the low-order byte, and the entire low-order byte is replaced with the high-order byte. On the other hand, the data of a specific bit among the random number bits extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is simply replaced with data of other bits (however, other than the masked seventh and fifteenth bits). Also good. Alternatively, the random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be directly acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Further, it may be processed into a random number for internal lottery by a method different from the above embodiment.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram of a first modification of the process until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in the first modification, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register (R register) 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The value of the lower byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) is left as it is.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, a value obtained by adding a processing random number to the upper byte with 8080h. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram of a second modification of the process until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in this example, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal R register 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). Further, the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R is also added to the lower byte value (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs a logical OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, the value obtained by adding the processing random numbers to the upper byte and the lower byte, respectively, with 8080h. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  In the first and second modified examples described above, the value of the R register 41R is extracted as a random number for processing, and this is extracted from the high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 (in the second modified example, the lower byte) ) To process random numbers. The random number processing applied here includes at least processing for adding a processing random number to the upper byte. Thereby, the variation of the random numbers for internal lottery can be increased, and the player can prevent the aiming as much as possible.

  Further, since the processing random numbers are extracted from the R register 41R, no special configuration is required as means for generating the processing random numbers. Moreover, the value of the R register 41R is updated every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction, and the update interval is not constant. Therefore, a random number with high randomness can be extracted as a processing random number. And since the randomness of the processing random number is high, the randomness of the random number for internal lottery generated using the random number is also high.

  In the first and second modified examples, the value extracted from the R register 41R is added to the upper byte (and the lower byte) of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. A value that is periodically updated by hardware or software may be added. Further, instead of adding a value extracted from the R register 41R (or a value instead of the R register), a logical operation such as subtraction, logical sum, or logical product may be performed.

  Further, bit replacement such as replacement of the upper byte and the lower byte shown in the above embodiment may be used in combination with the first and second modifications. Also in the first and second modified examples, the interruption to the CPU 41a is prohibited in order to prevent the contents of the HL register from being rewritten until the processing is completed after the random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. Will be.

  In the second modification, processing random numbers to be added to the upper and lower bytes of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be separately extracted from the R register 41R at different timings. Separately prepare the processing random number to be added to the upper byte and the processing random number to be updated to the lower byte. Means for extracting may be provided. In this case, one of the means for updating the processing random number for the upper byte and the means for updating the processing random number for the lower byte can be constituted by the R register.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the case where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42, that is, the random number extracted by the hardware random number function is processed by software has been described. However, the random number processing by the software described above may be applied to random numbers that are periodically updated by software. For example, the CPU 41a sends an instruction to the second microcomputer to extract a random number periodically updated by a timer interrupt or the like in a second microcomputer different from the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41, and I The data can be input to the CPU 41a via the / O port 41d and stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. The function of the second microcomputer may be included in the microcomputer that constitutes the main control unit 41. Also in this case, the random number value obtained after processing can be varied, and the effect of preventing the player from aiming can be achieved.

  In the above, the extracted random number and the processed random number are stored in the general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a. In the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination is sequentially added to the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. However, a random number after processing, that is, an acquired random number may be stored in the RAM 41c, and the number of determination values for each combination may be sequentially added to the value stored in the RAM 41c.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, after the game ends at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is set to be invalid, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, Until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is enabled, the clerk performs a reset operation until the stop state is released The setting of the number of bets is prohibited in any of the periods, but any setting is possible as long as the setting of the number of bets is prohibited in at least one of these periods.

  Further, although the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a stop function, it may be applied to a slot machine not equipped with a stop function.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the waiting time for producing the BB winning effect and the waiting time for producing the BB end effect may be the same time or different times.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus winning is applied as the special winning that the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (the waiting time for the production of the BB winning effect) at the time of winning, but other special winnings ( Regular bonus winning etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of types of special winnings. Furthermore, even if the same type of special prize is awarded, there are more than one type of big bonus prize or regular bonus prize (for example, a combination of symbols constituting the bonus prize or a color of a symbol constituting the bonus prize). Or if the two are different, or if the bonus consists of different bonus controls, such as the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Sometimes the setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special winning (big bonus winning and regular bonus winning), big bonus winning or regular bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special gaming state in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (ending waiting time for producing the ending effect) at the end, but other special gaming states (regular) Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be set to be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the end may differ depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and regular bonus) and the type of big bonus or regular bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special game state controlled to the stop state in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until the reset operation is performed after the end, but other special game states (Regular Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, at the time when the end of the game is determined, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled and the setting of the bet amount is prohibited ( In the ending effect stage waiting time, the credit can be settled. For example, in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined is the ending effect stage waiting time. Control to the stop state when reaching the, and prohibit both setting of the number of bets and the settlement of the credit until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the production waiting time of the ending effect, When the elapsed time reaches the production waiting time for the ending production, only the prohibition of credit settlement may be canceled. As a result, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the credit cannot be settled until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. Since it is possible to settle credits without waiting for the release of the stop state, the medal for the credits stored as owned by the player should be returned, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Can receive. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed, particularly when the big bonus ends.

  In the above embodiment, the end of the game is determined by the end of the game end processing. However, the game is substantially ended by the end of the medal payout. The end may be determined. In other words, the credit can be settled from the end of the payout process.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the timer counter common to the production wait time timer count for timing the production waiting time for the BB winning production and the production wait time timer count for measuring the production waiting time for the ending production is provided. However, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. The checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum is stored is calculated. If the result is 00 (H), it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and must be 00 (H). For example, it may be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is Since the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00 (H), it is determined that the data of the RAM 41c is normal. This is because it can.

  In this case as well, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5A (H)) in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address, and at the time of restoration In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00 (H), it is also determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is normally stored. The checksum is 00 (H) and the destructive diagnosis is performed. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the business data is also normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00 (H) is stored in all areas, it will be determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, After storing the destructive diagnostic data with the bit set to 1, calculate the checksum and store it in a specific area, and also check the destructive diagnostic data in addition to checking the checksum at startup, For example, even if all areas are cleared to 0 at startup, and the checksum is 00 (H) and determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of power failure, Since the determination is made, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in the RAM 41c.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00 (H). RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area, and the RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is calculated, and the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area is calculated. The data in the RAM 41c depends on whether the comparison result matches It may be determined whether normal or not. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above-described embodiment, 5A (H) is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 may be stored and can be confirmed at the time of startup.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  In the embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the main control unit 41. However, the reset circuit is connected to the main control unit 41. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted in other places. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  In the embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slot machine for setting bets using game balls. Alternatively, it may be a complete credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, the ball capturing device 30 ′ and the ball capturing device 30 ′ for capturing the game ball are used. In addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device 34 ′ for paying out a game ball, a ball payout, and the like are provided. A payout ball detection switch 35 ′ for detecting a game ball paid out by the device 34 ′ is provided, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls, and generating a prize. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out.

  Each element in the embodiment corresponds to the present invention as follows.

The slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention includes:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed by displaying and displaying the display results of the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display results of the variable display devices. ) And
Special game state transition means (process at the end of the game by the CPU 41a) for transitioning to a special game state (big bonus) when a transition prize (big bonus) accompanied by transition of the game state occurs in the normal game (normal game state);
In a special game (regular bonus) in which a special prize (small bonus) accompanying the provision of the gaming value in the special gaming state is generated with a higher probability than the normal game, the game reaches a predetermined period (12 games or is awarded eight times). Special game control means for controlling (game end processing by the CPU 41a),
Special game determination means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game (game end processing by the CPU 41a);
With
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game for each game in the special game state (step of step Sk9 of the game end process),
The special game control means starts control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is not controlled (step of the game end process Sk10).
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
Special game state end condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition for ending special game state (the total payout in the big bonus reaches 466) is satisfied in the special game state (big bonus) (Step 7 of the game end process)
When the special game state end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied, special game state end means (step Sk8 of the game end process) for ending the special game state;
With
The special game control means ends the control of the special game at the end of the special gaming state regardless of whether or not the predetermined period has expired (step Sk8 of processing at the end of the game)
The special game determining means determines that the special game state end condition is not satisfied after the special game state end condition determining means determines whether or not the special game state end condition is satisfied. Only when it is determined, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game (when the BB end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sk7, the process proceeds to the step of Sk9).
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed by displaying and displaying the display results of the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display results of the variable display devices. ) And
Special game state transition means (process at the end of the game by the CPU 41a) for transitioning to a special game state (big bonus) when a transition prize (big bonus) accompanied by transition of the game state occurs in the normal game (normal game state);
In a special game (regular bonus) in which a special prize (small bonus) accompanying the provision of the gaming value in the special gaming state is generated with a higher probability than the normal game, the game reaches a predetermined period (12 games or is awarded eight times). Special game control means for controlling (game end processing by the CPU 41a),
With
The special game control means resumes the control of the special game when the predetermined period expires after the control of the special game is started and the control of the special game is finished (the big bonus is displayed when the regular bonus is over). If the bonus has not expired, activate the regular bonus again)
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 3,
Special game state end condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition for ending special game state (the total payout in the big bonus reaches 466) is satisfied in the special game state (big bonus) (Step 7 of the game end process)
When the special game state end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied, special game state end means (step Sk8 of the game end process) for ending the special game state;
With
The special game control means includes
Regardless of whether or not the predetermined period has expired, the control of the special game is terminated at the end of the special gaming state (step Sk8 of the game end process),
Whether or not the special game state end condition is satisfied by the special game state end condition determining means when the predetermined period has expired after the start of the special game control and the special game control ends. After the determination, the control of the special game is resumed only when it is determined that the special game state end condition is not satisfied (when the BB end condition is not satisfied, the regular bonus ends) If the game is fulfilled, activate the regular bonus again),
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
An external output control means (output control of an external output signal by the CPU 41a) that performs control for externally outputting a special game signal indicating that the special game is controlled;
The external output control means performs control to stop the output of the special game signal for a predetermined time and then start the output again when the special game ends and is controlled again by the special game (game end processing) Steps of Sk12 to Sk18 and Sk25 to Sk27)
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine according to claim 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), a plurality of types having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining that the pre-decision means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) allows the occurrence of a prize are determined. An allowable stage setting means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting and setting one of the allowable stages from the allowable stages (setting values);
Data storage means (RAM 41c) for storing data for performing control of the game including data indicating the allowable stage set by the allowable stage setting means in a readable and writable manner;
Storage data determination means (determination of RAM parity and determination of destruction diagnosis data by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means (error processing by the CPU 41a) for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the data storing means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means (newly set by setting change processing) On the condition that the value has been selected and set), the disabling cancellation means (transition to the game processing by the CPU 41a) that cancels the disabled state of the game and enables the progress of the game,
Comprising
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
A main control board (game control board 40) equipped with main control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
A sub-control board (production control board 90) equipped with sub-control means (sub-control unit 91) for controlling the production based on reception of the control information (command) transmitted from the main control means;
A relay board (production relay board 80) that connects the main control board and the sub control board in a communicable manner;
Comprising
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
The pre-determining means selects and sets one of the allowable stages (setting values) from among a plurality of types of allowable stages (setting values) with different ratios (winning probabilities) that determine whether or not winning is permitted. Permissible stage setting means (setting change processing by the CPU 41a),
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition process by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area (the general purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as a random number for lottery;
For any one of the prizes (JAC, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), replay), the predetermination means permits generation of the determination numerical data input to the determination area. The range specifying data (the number of determination values) determined so that the range of the determination value that determines the value can be specified is stored in common for the plurality of types of allowable stages (setting values 1 to 6). For winnings (regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), bell) for which no judgment value data is stored in common in the permissible stage, with respect to the judgment numerical data input to the judgment area The range specifying data (number of determination values) determined so that the range of the determination value for which the predetermining means determines that the generation is allowed can be specified according to the type of the allowable stage. Individually Range specifying data storage means for 憶 a (storage area winning combination by the table and the determination value of the number in the ROM 41b),
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the occurrence is permitted (the lottery process for judging the winning of the combination based on whether or not the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows) ), And a decision to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means (when the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values overflows) And that role will be elected)
The range specifying data storage means is different range specifying data (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), which can specify different determination value ranges as range specifying data to be stored individually according to the type of the permissible stage, Bell determination value number) and the same range specification data (regular bonus determination value number) indicating the same determination value range as the range specification data individually stored according to the type of the permissible stage, Remember according to type,
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, means 1 and 2,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition process by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area (the general purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as a random number for lottery;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specifying data storage means for storing specific data (number of determination values) (storage area for role-specific table and determination value number in ROM 41b);
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the occurrence is permitted (the lottery process for judging the winning of the combination based on whether or not the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows) ), And a decision to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means (when the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values overflows) And that role will be elected)
The slot machine is
A pulse generation circuit (pulse generation circuit 42a) for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit (lower counter 42b, upper counter 42c) that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit (sampling circuit 43) for outputting
Input means for inputting the n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit into the specific area (CPU 41a general-purpose register 41GR) as n-bit numerical data without changing the bit-arrangement order (random number to the general-purpose register 41GR by the CPU 41a) 16-bit data signal output from the generation circuit 42),
Further comprising
The numerical data input means includes specific bit data (upper 8-bit data) of n-bit numerical data input to the specific area, and other bits of data (lower 8). Bit data) is replaced, and the replaced n-bit replacement numerical data is input to the determination area (the general-purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 3,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition process by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area (the general purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as a random number for lottery;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specifying data storage means for storing specific data (number of determination values) (storage area for role-specific table and determination value number in ROM 41b);
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the occurrence is permitted (the lottery process for judging the winning of the combination based on whether or not the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows) ), And a decision to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means (when the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values overflows) And that role will be elected)
The slot machine is
A pulse generation circuit (pulse generation circuit 42a) for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit (lower counter 42b, upper counter 42c) that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit (sampling circuit 43) for outputting
Input means (general-purpose register 41GR by CPU 41a) for inputting the n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit as the first numeric data of n-bit without changing the bit array order to a specific area (general-purpose register 41GR of CPU 41a) To the 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42),
Numerical value updating means (R register 41R of the CPU 41a) for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Numerical value extraction means (extraction of the value of the R register 41R by the CPU 41a) for extracting the second numerical data updated by the numerical value update means when the predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The numerical value extraction means extracts upper k bits (upper 8 bits of data) in the first numerical data of upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and lower j bits (j = n−k). Arithmetic means for performing a predetermined operation using the second numerical data (addition of a processing random number extracted from the R register to the value of the upper byte of the general-purpose register 41GR by the CPU 41a);
Further comprising
The numerical data input means is a numerical value for determination which is obtained by calculating numerical data (data obtained by adding the value extracted from the R register 41R to the upper byte) consisting of the upper k bits and the lower j bits after the calculation by the calculating means. Input as data (random numbers for internal lottery) into the determination area (the general-purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a),
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 4,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition process by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area (the general purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as a random number for lottery;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specifying data storage means for storing specific data (number of determination values) (storage area for role-specific table and determination value number in ROM 41b);
With
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the occurrence is permitted (the lottery process for judging the winning of the combination based on whether or not the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows) ), And a decision to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means (when the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values overflows) And that role will be elected)
The slot machine is
A pulse generation circuit (pulse generation circuit 42a) for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit (lower counter 42b, upper counter 42c) that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit (sampling circuit 43) for outputting
Input means (general-purpose register 41GR by CPU 41a) for inputting the n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit as the first numeric data of n-bit without changing the bit array order to a specific area (general-purpose register 41GR of CPU 41a) To the 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42),
First numerical value updating means (R register 41R of CPU 41a) for updating second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Second numerical value updating means (R register 41R of the CPU 41a) for updating third numerical data different from the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
First numerical value extraction means (extraction of the value of the R register 41R by the CPU 41a) for extracting second numerical data from the first numerical value update means when a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
Second numerical value extraction means (extraction of the value of the R register 41R by the CPU 41a) for extracting third numerical data from the second numerical value update means when a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The first numerical value extraction means for upper k bits (upper 8-bit data) in the first numerical data of upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and lower j bits (j = n−k) A predetermined calculation is performed using the second numerical data extracted by the second numerical data, and a predetermined calculation is performed using the third numerical data extracted by the second numerical value extraction means for the lower j bits (lower 8 bits of data). An arithmetic means for performing arithmetic (addition of a processing random number extracted from the R register 41R to the value of the upper byte and the lower byte of the general-purpose register 41GR by the CPU 41a);
Further comprising
The numerical data input means is arithmetic result numerical data consisting of upper k bits after the operation by the arithmetic means and lower j bits after the operation (data obtained by adding the value extracted from the R register 41R to the upper byte and the lower byte) Is input to the determination area (the general-purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as the determination numerical data (random number for internal lottery),
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 5,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition process by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area (the general purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as a random number for lottery;
A range determined so as to be able to specify a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of the numerical value data for determination input in the determination region for the winning Range specifying data storage means for storing specific data (number of determination values) (storage area for role-specific table and determination value number in ROM 41b);
With
The range specifying data storage means determines as the range specifying data that the transition winning (special combination) and the normal winning (small combination, re-playing combination) are allowed to occur simultaneously as the range specifying data. The overlapping range specification data (the number of judgment values for determining the winning of both the small role or the re-playing role and the special role) that can specify the range of
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the occurrence is permitted (the lottery process for judging the winning of the combination based on whether or not the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows) ), And a decision to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means (when the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values overflows) And that role will be elected)
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 and means 1 to 6,
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Before the determination by the prior determination means, the numerical data updated within a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing (when the start switch 7 is detected) Numeric data input means (random number acquisition process by the CPU 41a) for inputting to the determination area (the general purpose register 41GR of the CPU 41a) as a random number for lottery;
With respect to the normal winning (small role, replaying role), a range of determination values that will determine that the predetermination means allows the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area is specified. Normal winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data (number of judgment values of small role and re-playing role) determined so as to be possible (a role-specific table for the small role and re-playing role and a small number in the ROM 41b) And storage area for the number of judgment values of the combination and re-playing combination)
It is possible to specify a range of determination values for the transition winning a prize (special role) that will determine that the pre-determining means allows the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area. Transition winning range specifying data storage means for storing the range specifying data (special role determination value number) defined in (a special-purpose role-specific table and a small role and special role determination value storage area in the ROM 41b) When,
With
The range of determination values that the predetermining means determines to allow the occurrence of the transfer prize is the determination value that determines that the predetermining means allows the occurrence of the normal prize Including a range of judgment values that overlaps with the range of judgment values (a range of judgment values in which a small role or a replaying role and a special role are selected and won)
The pre-determining means includes
The occurrence of the normal winning is determined depending on whether or not the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the normal winning range specifying data storage means includes the determination numerical data input to the determination area. Normal winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not it is permitted (based on whether or not the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values has overflowed, the winning of the small role and the replaying role is determined. Judgment lottery process)
Whether or not the same numerical value data for determination as that used for determination by the normal winning allowance determination means is included in the range of determination values specified by the range specification data stored in the range specification data storage means for transfer prize Transition winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the transition winning is permitted (specify whether the value obtained by adding the random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values overflows or not) Lottery process to determine the winning of the role)
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the normal winning allowance determining means and the transition winning allowance determining means,
When it is determined that both the normal winning allowance determining means and the transition winning allowance determining means indicate that the winning is permitted, it is determined that both the normal winning and the transition winning are permitted ( If winning is determined by both the lottery process for determining the winning of the small role and the re-playing role, and the lottery process for determining the winning of the special role, And both are elected)
It is characterized by that.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. (A) is a figure which shows the combination table according to gaming state. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which respectively shows the example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the number of determination values of each combination, and the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery of the regular bonus, the number of judgment values of each combination, and the winning combination, respectively. (A) is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a random number generation circuit. (B) is explanatory drawing until a CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM41b. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the external output signal output from a slot machine. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of BB signal and RB signal among external output signals. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a continuous production. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment process which CPU of a main control part performs in BET processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number acquisition process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 1 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 2 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 3 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production waiting process which CPU of the main control part performs in the process at the time of completion | finish of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is explanatory drawing of the 1st modification of a process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd modification of the process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 40 Game control board 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
42 Random Number Generation Circuit 43 Sampling Circuit 90 Production Control Board 91 Sub Control Unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each game Is a slot machine in which one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state when a transition winning with a transition of the gaming state occurs in a normal game;
Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period a special game in which a special prize that accompanies the provision of the gaming value in the special gaming state occurs with a higher probability than the normal game;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled in the special game state;
With
The special game control means starts control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is not controlled.
A slot machine characterized by that.

Images